JVC Camcorder GY HM650U User Manual
.
HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER  
GY-HM650U/GY-HM650E  
INSTRUCTIONS  
DE  
CO  
E
TIM  
.
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement  
without prior notice.  
Please check the latest version of the INSTRUCTIONS from the following Mobile User Guide, or  
download the PDF from the URL below.  
Mobile User Guide  
When you are outside, you can refer to the instructions from your Android phone or  
iPhone.  
http://manual3.jvckenwood.com/pro/mobile/global/  
You can view the Mobile User Guide using the browser on your Android phone or  
iPhone.  
Please read the following before getting started:  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.  
Before operating this unit, please read the  
instructions carefully to ensure the best  
possible performance.  
For Customer Use:  
In this manual, each model number is  
Enter below the Serial No. which is located  
described without the last letter (U/E) which  
means the shipping destination.  
(U: for USA and Canada, E: for Europe)  
Only “U” models (GY-HM650U) have been  
evaluated by UL.  
on the body.  
Retain this information for future reference.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
GY-HM650U  
.
LST1428-001A  
Ver. 1.00  
Safety Precautions  
This device complies with Part 15 of  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful  
FOR USA AND CANADA  
interference, and (2) this device must  
accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC  
SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
Changes or modifications not  
CAUTION:  
approved by JVC could void the  
user’s authority to operate the  
equipment. This equipment has been  
tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class A digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference when the equipment is  
operated in a commercial  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF  
ELECTRIC SHOCK.  
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR  
BACK).  
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS  
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO  
QUALIFIED SERVICE  
PERSONNEL.  
The lightning flash with  
arrowhead symbol, within  
an equilateral triangle is  
intended to alert the user to  
the presence of uninsulated  
“dangerous voltage” within  
the product’s enclosure that  
may be of sufficient  
environment.  
This equipment generates, uses, and  
can radiate radio frequency energy  
and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may  
cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this  
equipment in a residential area is  
likely to cause harmful interference in  
which case the user will be required  
to correct the interference at his own  
expense.  
magnitude to constitute a  
risk of electric shock to  
persons.  
.
The exclamation point within  
an equilateral triangle is  
intended to alert the user to  
the presence of important  
operating and maintenance  
(servicing) instructions in  
the literature accompanying  
the appliance.  
.
3
POUR CANADA  
ATTENTION  
WARNING:TO PREVENT FIRE OR  
SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT  
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR  
MOISTURE.  
RISQUE  
D’ELECTROCUTION  
NE PAS OUVRIR  
AVERTISSEMENT : POUR EVITER  
LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU  
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS  
EXPOSER L’APPAREIL A LA  
PLUIE NI A L’HUMIDITE.  
ATTENTION:  
POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE  
D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS  
OUVRIR LE BOITER. AUCUNE  
PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A  
REGLER PAR L’UTILISATEUR. SE  
REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE  
EN CAS DE PROBLEME.  
NOTES:  
ꢀ The rating plate and safety caution are  
on the bottom and/or the back of the  
main unit.  
Le symbole de l’éclair à  
l’intérieur d’un triangle  
équilatéral est destiné à  
alerter l’utilisateur sur la  
présence d’une “tension  
dangereuse” non isolée dans  
le boîtier du produit. Cette  
tension est suffisante pour  
provoquer l’électrocution de  
personnes.  
ꢀ The serial number plate is on the  
bottom of the unit.  
ꢀ The rating information and safety  
caution of the AC adapter are on its  
upper and lower sides.  
REMARQUES :  
ꢀ La plaque d’identification et  
l’avertissement de sécurité se trouvent  
sous l’appareil et/ou au dos.  
ꢀ La plaque du numéro de série est  
située sur la partie inférieure de  
l’appareil.  
Le point d’exclamation à  
l’intérieur d’un triangle  
équilatéral est destiné à  
alerter l’utilisateur sur la  
présence d’opérations  
d’entretien importantes au  
sujet desquelles des  
renseignements se trouvent  
dans le manuel  
ꢀ Les informations d’identification et  
l’avertissement de sécurité de  
l’adaptateur secteur sont situés sur ses  
côtés supérieur et inférieur.  
d’instructions.  
Caution on Replaceable lithium  
Ces symboles ne sont  
utilisés qu’aux Etats-Unis.  
battery  
The battery used in this device may  
present a fire or chemical burn hazard if  
mistreated.  
CAUTION:  
The mains plug shall remain readily  
operable.  
ꢀ Remove the mains plug immediately if  
the camera functions abnormally.  
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat  
above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate.  
Replace battery with Panasonic, Sanyo,  
Sony or Maxell CR2025.  
Danger of explosion or risk of fire if the  
battery is incorrectly replaced.  
ꢀ Dispose of used battery promptly.  
ꢀ Keep away from children.  
ꢀ Do not disassemble and do not dispose  
of in fire.  
WARNING:  
The battery pack, the camera with  
battery installed, and the remote control  
with battery installed should not be  
exposed to excessive heat such as direct  
sunlight, fire or the like.  
.
.
4
When the equipment is installed in a  
cabinet or on a shelf, make sure that it  
has sufficient space on all sides to allow  
for ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16") or more  
on both sides, on top and at the rear).  
Do not block the ventilation holes.  
(If the ventilation holes are blocked by a  
newspaper, or cloth etc. the heat may not  
be able to get out.)  
When using the AC adapter in  
areas other than the USA  
The provided AC adapter features  
automatic voltage selection in the AC  
range from 110 V to 240 V.  
USING HOUSEHOLD AC PLUG  
ADAPTER  
In case of connecting the unit’s power  
cord to an AC wall outlet other than  
American National Standard C73 series  
type, use an AC plug adapter called a  
“Siemens Plug” as shown.  
For this AC plug adapter, consult your  
nearest JVC dealer.  
No naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, should be placed on the  
apparatus.  
When discarding batteries,  
environmental problems must be  
considered and the local rules or laws  
governing the disposal of these batteries  
must be followed strictly.  
Plug Adapter  
The apparatus shall not be exposed to  
dripping or splashing and that no objects  
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be  
placed on the apparatus.  
ꢀ Remove the AC adapter from the AC  
wall outlet when not in use.  
ꢀ Do not leave dust or metal objects  
adhered to the AC wall outlet or AC  
adapter (power/DC plug).  
.
Do not point the lens directly into the  
sun. This can cause eye injuries, as well  
as lead to the malfunctioning of internal  
circuitry. There is also a risk of fire or  
electric shock.  
CAUTION!  
The following notes concern possible  
physical damage to this unit and to the  
user.  
Carrying or holding this unit by the LCD  
monitor can result in dropping the unit,  
or in a malfunction.  
Do not use a tripod on unsteady or  
unlevel surfaces. It could tip over,  
causing serious damage to the unit.  
CAUTION!  
Connecting cables (Audio/Video, etc.) to  
this unit and leaving it on top of the TV is  
not recommended, as tripping on the  
cables will cause the unit to fall, resulting  
in damage.  
.
5
FOR EUROPE  
IMPORTANT (for owners in the  
U.K.)  
This equipment is in conformity with the  
provisions and protection requirements of  
the corresponding European Directives.  
This equipment is designed for professional  
video appliances and can be used in the  
following environments:  
Connection to the mains supply in  
the United Kingdom.  
DO NOT cut off the mains plug  
from this equipment.  
If the plug fitted is not suitable for the  
power points in your home or the cable is  
too short to reach a power point, then  
obtain an appropriate safety approved  
extension lead or consult your dealer.  
BE SURE to replace the fuse only with  
an identical approved type, as originally  
fitted, and to replace the fuse cover.  
If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off  
be sure to remove the fuse and dispose  
of the plug immediately, to avoid possible  
shock hazard by inadvertent connection  
to the mains supply.  
If this product is not supplied fitted with a  
mains plug then follow the instructions  
given below:  
DO NOT make any connection to the  
Larger Terminal coded E or Green.  
The wires in the mains lead are coloured  
in accordance with the following code:  
ꢀ Controlled EMC environment (for  
example, purpose-built broadcasting or  
recording studio), and rural outdoors  
environments.  
In order to keep the best performance and  
furthermore for electromagnetic  
compatibility we recommend to use cables  
not exceeding the following lengths:  
Port  
DC INPUT  
USB Mini  
AV OUT  
Cable  
Length  
1.8 m  
Exclusive  
Cable  
Shielded  
Cable  
3 m  
1.5 m  
3 m  
1 m  
10 m  
3 m  
3 m  
5 m  
5 m  
Exclusive  
Cable  
Shielded  
Cable  
HDMI  
Exclusive  
Cable  
REMOTE  
HD/SD SDI  
AUDIO INPUT 1/2  
HEADPHONE  
AUX  
Blue to N  
Coaxial  
Cable  
(Neutral) or Black  
Brown to L (Live)  
or Red  
Shielded  
Cable  
If these colours do not correspond with  
the terminal identifications of your plug,  
connect as follows:  
Blue wire to terminal coded N (Neutral)  
or coloured black.  
Brown wire to terminal coded L (Live) or  
coloured Red.  
Exclusive  
Cable  
Shielded  
Cable  
Shielded  
Cable  
TC  
If in doubt — consult a competent  
electrician.  
The inrush current of this apparatus is  
4.9 A.  
CAUTIONS:  
CAUTIONS:  
Where there are strong electromagnetic  
waves or magnetism, for example near a  
radio or TV transmitter, transformer,  
motor, etc., the picture and the sound  
may be disturbed. In such case, please  
keep the apparatus away from the  
sources of the disturbance.  
ꢀ To prevent shock, do not open the  
cabinet. No user serviceable parts  
inside.  
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.  
ꢀ When you are not using the AC  
adapter for a long period of time, it is  
recommended that you disconnect the  
power cord from AC outlet.  
.
.
6
Information for Users on Disposal  
of Old Equipment and Batteries  
Dear Customer,  
This apparatus is in conformance with  
the valid European directives and  
standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
European representative of  
JVC KENWOOD Corporation is:  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
Battery  
Notice:  
Products  
The sign Pb below the  
symbol for batteries indicates  
that this battery contains lead.  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
[European Union]  
These symbols indicate that the electrical  
and electronic equipment and the battery  
with this symbol should not be disposed of  
as general household waste at its  
end-of-life.  
Instead, the products should be handed  
over to the applicable collection points for  
the recycling of electrical and electronic  
equipment as well as batteries for proper  
treatment, recovery and recycling in  
accordance with your national legislation  
and the Directive 2002/96/EC and  
2006/66/EC.  
By disposing of these products correctly,  
you will help to conserve natural resources  
and will help to prevent potential negative  
effects on the environment and human  
health which could otherwise be caused by  
inappropriate waste handling of these  
products.  
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr  
geehrte Kundin,  
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen  
europäischen Richtlinien und Normen  
bezüglich elektromagnetischer  
Verträglichkeit und elektrischer  
Sicherheit überein.  
Die europäische Vertretung für die  
JVC KENWOOD Corporation ist:  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
Deutschland  
CAUTION:  
To avoid electric  
shock or damage to  
the unit, first firmly  
For more information about collection  
points and recycling of these products,  
please contact your local municipal office,  
your household waste disposal service or  
the shop where you purchased the  
product.  
insert the small end  
of the power cord into the AC Adapter  
until it is no longer wobbly, and then plug  
the larger end of the power cord in to an  
AC outlet.  
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect  
disposal of this waste, in accordance with  
national legislation.  
FOR EUROPEAN  
WARNING  
(Business users)  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic  
environment this product may cause  
radio interference in which case the user  
may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
If you wish to dispose of this product,  
please visit our web page  
http://www.jvc.eu to obtain information  
about the take-back of the product.  
[Other Countries outside the  
European Union]  
.
These symbols are only valid in the  
European Union.  
If you wish to dispose of these items,  
please do so in accordance with applicable  
national legislation or other rules in your  
country for the treatment of old electrical  
and electronic equipment and batteries.  
.
7
Battery Pack  
The supplied battery pack is a lithium-ion  
battery. Before using the supplied battery  
pack or an optional battery pack, be sure  
to read the following cautions:  
Terminals  
ꢀ To avoid hazards  
... do not burn.  
... do not short-circuit the  
terminals. Keep it away  
from metallic objects  
when not in use.  
When transporting, carry the battery in  
a plastic bag.  
... do not modify or disassemble.  
... do not expose the battery to  
temperatures exceeding 60°C (140°F),  
as this may cause the battery to  
overheat, explode or catch fire.  
... use only specified chargers.  
ꢀ To prevent damage and prolong  
service life  
... do not subject to unnecessary shock.  
... charge within the temperature range  
of 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F). Cooler  
temperatures require longer charging  
time, or in some cases stop charging  
at all. Warmer temperatures prevent  
complete charging, or in some cases  
stop charging at all.  
... store in a cool, dry place. Extended  
exposure to high temperatures will  
increase natural discharge and  
shorten service life.  
... keep a 30% battery level  
if the  
battery pack is not to be used for a  
long period of time.  
In addition, fully charge and then fully  
discharge the battery pack every 6  
months, then continue to store it at a  
30% battery level  
.
... remove from charger or powered unit  
when not in use, as some machines  
use current even when switched off.  
... do not drop or subject to strong  
impact.  
.
8
9
Adjusting the Brightness .................................. 51  
Adjusting the Iris .............................................. 52  
Setting the Gain ............................................... 53  
Setting the Electronic Shutter .......................... 54  
Setting the ND Filter ........................................ 56  
Adjusting the White Balance ............................ 56  
Adjusting the Camera Image ........................... 59  
Using the Image Stabilizer ............................... 59  
Audio Recording .............................................. 60  
Contents  
Introduction  
Safety Precautions ............................................ 3  
Contents .......................................................... 10  
Main Features ................................................. 12  
Precautions for Proper Use ............................. 14  
Operation Modes ............................................. 18  
Names of Parts ................................................ 20  
Side Control Panel ....................................... 22  
SD Slot ......................................................... 23  
Rear Terminal .............................................. 23  
LCD Monitor ................................................ 24  
Lens Section ................................................ 25  
Basic System Diagram .................................... 26  
Monitoring Audio Sound During Recording Using a  
Headphone ...................................................... 62  
Time Code and User’s Bit ................................ 63  
Setting Time Code Generator .......................... 64  
Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera  
......................................................................... 67  
Setting Zebra Pattern ...................................... 68  
Setting Spot Meter ........................................... 68  
Acquiring Positioning Information by GPS ....... 70  
Preparations  
Settings and Adjustments Before Use ............. 27  
Adjusting the Grip Belt ................................. 27  
Attaching an External Microphone ............... 27  
Attaching the Tripod ..................................... 27  
Attaching the Large Eyecup ......................... 27  
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover ................. 28  
Attaching/Detaching the Hood ..................... 28  
Power Supply .................................................. 28  
Using a Battery Pack .................................... 28  
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) ................... 30  
Power Status Display ...................................... 30  
Turning On/Off the Power ................................ 31  
Initial Settings .................................................. 32  
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder .. 34  
Display Screen ............................................. 34  
Status Screen .............................................. 35  
USB Mode Screen ....................................... 35  
Remote Edit Mode Screen ........................... 35  
Warning Display ........................................... 35  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder ...... 36  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor ........................... 36  
Adjusting the Viewfinder .............................. 37  
Assigning Functions to User Buttons ............... 38  
Tally Lamp ....................................................... 38  
SD Card ........................................................... 39  
Usable Cards ............................................... 39  
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards ................ 41  
Restoring the SD Card ................................. 42  
Clips Recorded to SD Cards ........................ 43  
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip  
Review) ........................................................... 71  
Recording Simultaneously at Two Different  
Definitions ....................................................... 72  
Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter Trig) ....... 72  
Dual Rec .......................................................... 73  
Backup Rec ..................................................... 74  
Special Recording ........................................... 76  
Pre Rec ........................................................ 76  
Clip Continuous Rec .................................... 77  
Frame Rec ................................................... 78  
Interval Rec .................................................. 79  
Variable Frame Rec ..................................... 81  
Playback  
Playing Recorded Clips ................................... 82  
Thumbnail Screen ........................................ 82  
Actions ......................................................... 84  
Playing back ................................................ 86  
Deleting Clips .................................................. 87  
Appending/Deleting OK Mark .......................... 88  
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple  
Clips ................................................................ 89  
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly ............... 89  
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively ........ 89  
Menu Display and Detailed Settings  
Basic Operations in Menu Screen ................... 91  
Display and Description of the Menu Screen  
..................................................................... 92  
Text Input with Software Keyboard .............. 93  
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart ..................... 94  
Camera Function Menu ................................... 95  
User Switch Set Item .................................... 97  
Camera Process Menu .................................... 98  
Detail/Adjust Item ....................................... 100  
White Balance Item .................................... 101  
TC/UB Menu ................................................. 102  
Shooting  
Basic Shooting Procedures ............................. 44  
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video  
Format ............................................................. 45  
Zoom Operation .............................................. 47  
Focus Operation .............................................. 48  
Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection ...... 50  
10  
LCD/VF Menu ................................................ 103  
Shooting Assist Item .................................. 103  
Marker Settings Item .................................. 104  
Display Settings Item ................................. 105  
A/V Set Menu ................................................ 106  
Video Set Item ........................................... 106  
Audio Set Item ........................................... 107  
System Menu ................................................ 109  
Record Set Item ......................................... 111  
Settings Item .............................................. 115  
Clip Metadata ............................................ 146  
View Remote Feature .................................... 148  
Operating Procedure ................................. 148  
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom ............. 149  
Configuring Settings via a Browser ................ 151  
Changing View Remote Function Settings . 152  
Changing Connection Setup ...................... 152  
Changing Metadata Server Settings .......... 153  
Changing Clip Server Settings ................... 154  
Managing the Network Connection Settings File  
....................................................................... 154  
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items  
(Favorites Menu) ........................................... 117  
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu ...... 117  
Editing Favorites Menu .............................. 118  
Saving the Connection Settings File .......... 155  
Reading the Connection Settings File ........ 156  
Deleting Connection Settings .................... 156  
Display/Status Screen  
Display Screen in Camera Mode ................... 120  
Display Screen in Media Mode ...................... 125  
Status Screen ................................................ 127  
Others  
Error Messages and Actions ......................... 157  
List of FTP Transfer Errors ......................... 159  
Tally Lamp ................................................. 160  
Warning Tone ............................................ 160  
Troubleshooting ............................................ 161  
Specifications ................................................ 163  
Camera Features  
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode  
Only) .............................................................. 128  
Index ............................................................. 166  
Smoothening the Skin Color (Skin Detail  
.
Function) ....................................................... 128  
Color Bar Output ........................................... 128  
Adjusting Color Matrix ................................... 129  
Configuring Setup Files ................................. 130  
Saving Setup Files ..................................... 130  
Loading a Setup File .................................. 131  
Deleting Setup Files ................................... 132  
Connecting External Devices  
Managing/Editing Clips on a PC .................... 132  
Connecting External Monitor ......................... 134  
Connecting the Headphone ........................... 135  
Connecting Wired Remote Control ................ 136  
Connecting to the Network  
Functions of Network Connection .................. 136  
Preparing Network Connection ...................... 137  
Operating Environment .............................. 137  
Camera Setup for Network Connection ..... 137  
Connecting via Wireless LAN .................... 138  
Connecting via Wired LAN ......................... 139  
Connecting via 3G Adapter ........................ 140  
Importing Metadata ....................................... 140  
Preparing Metadata ................................... 140  
Configuring the Server for Downloading .... 141  
Importing Metadata .................................... 141  
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip ................. 142  
Configuring the FTP Server for Uploading . 142  
Uploading Video Clip ................................. 142  
Connecting via a Browser .............................. 144  
Editing Metadata ........................................... 145  
Planning Metadata ..................................... 145  
11  
QuickTime (MPEG-2 HD/H.264 HD/  
H.264 SD)/MP4 (MPEG-2 HD)/AVCHD  
File Formats  
Inheriting the concept of ProHD memory camera  
recorders, this camera recorder can support  
various file formats, such as AVCHD and  
QuickTime (H.264 SD) files, in addition to  
QuickTime (MPEG-2 HD/H.264 HD) files that can  
be directly edited on Apple Final Cut Pro and MP4  
files that are most suitable for XDCAM EX  
Nonlinear Editing Workflow.  
Main Features  
F11 Sensitivity, 1/3-inch Full HD 3CMOS  
Sensors  
This camera recorder is equipped with three 1/3-  
inch 2.07M pixels full HD CMOS sensors.  
It delivers high image quality, high color resolution  
through processing of individual R, G, B color  
signals. 12-bit signal processing and the new 2D  
DNR removes dark current and optical shot noise  
without losing S/N and high resolution, thereby  
achieving high F11 sensitivity.  
Two SDHC/SDXC Card Slots for Dual,  
Backup and Series Recording  
New Fujinon 23x Zoom Lens  
The most common SDHC/SDXC card recording  
It ensures high magnification of 29 mm at wide  
ends, and provides high sensitivity across all  
regions with F1.6-3.0.  
system is used as the memory card.  
Thisensuresreliabilityandoperationatlowrunning  
cost.  
The zoom ring with zoom ring pin enables zooming  
from the wide end to the tele end in 90 degrees.  
Focus and iris control are also possible using  
separate rings.  
Various user friendly recording systems are also  
available. These include dual recording of the  
same file to two cards, and using REC/STBY to  
break up video clips in one card while performing  
backup recording to the other card.  
Small, Lightweight, Stylish, and  
Ergonomic Design  
Diverse Simultaneous Recording  
Combinations (HD and SD, HD and  
Proxy Video, etc.)  
The camera recorder is only 2.5 kg in operation  
mode.  
It is light and easy to use. Its ergonomic design  
takes into consideration portability and operability  
and is easy on the hand during shooting.  
This camera recorder comes with a convenient  
proxy video (480x270 30p/25p/24p, 1.2 Mbps,  
MOV) recording function for distribution over the  
network.  
JVC’s Proprietary FALCONBRID High-  
With the Dual Rec feature further enhanced, you  
can now record videos in the HD quality on one  
SDHC/SDXC card, while at the same time record  
to the other card in the SD or proxy video quality.  
Quality Imaging Engine  
The FALCONBRID high-quality imaging engine  
omits unnecessary processing through  
incorporating camera processing and image  
compression on a single chip. Images from  
imaging devices are compressed and processed  
without any loss thereby achieving high-quality  
images.  
Variable Frame Rec  
Enables beautiful slow motion and quick motion  
image recording such as overcrank and  
undercrank.  
MPEG2 and H.264 Codec  
SDI/HDMI Simultaneous Output  
FALCONBRID allows users to select MPEG-2 and  
AVCHD, the most commonly used codec for  
professional video, as the recording format.  
Equipped with both [HD/SD SDI] and [HDMI]  
terminals as digital output.  
Non-compressed full HD video signals and audio  
signals can be output to the [HD/SD SDI] and  
[HDMI] terminals at the same time.  
12  
Auto Focus/Optical Image Stabilizer  
Built-in GPS  
The camera recorder is equipped with a face  
detection auto focus function that covers the entire  
screen.  
This camera recorder is equipped with a GPS  
function. Position information obtained from the  
GPS satellite can be recorded as metadata during  
shooting.  
It can switch to manual focus as well.  
A built-in optical image stabilizer feature is also  
available.  
Diverse Wireless Communications  
Functions  
Professional Switch Layout and Various  
Video Parameter Settings  
This camera recorder supports various operations  
via a mobile device, such as remote control,  
viewing, metadata transmission, and transfer of  
proxy files as an FTP client.  
Switches for Gain and White Balance are available  
on the side panel to enable quick switchings  
according to the shooting scene.  
Equipped with a USB host function, you can upload  
files recorded in this camera recorder via the  
network by connecting it to the optional wireless  
LAN adapter or other network devices.  
Image parameters such as gamma and color  
matrixes are also available in the menu for  
adjusting preferred tones.  
4-position ND Filter  
Application Software Provided  
This camera recorder incorporates three types of  
The [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] application  
software is provided for you to copy recorded clips  
to Windows or Macintosh computers and for  
checking the video images. (For MP4 file format)  
ND filters.  
Adjust the amount of light according to the  
brightness during shooting by switching the 4-  
position ND filter (OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64).  
The CD-ROM provided with this camera  
recorder comes with [JVC ProHD Clip  
Manager] and other application software as well  
as their user guides.  
0.45-inch 1.22M Pixel Color Viewfinder,  
3.5-inch 920K Pixel LCD Display  
(Equipped with Focus Assist Function)  
* For details, refer to the user guides for each  
application software.  
Built-in Stereo Microphone, 2-channel  
XLR Audio Input (Microphone/Line  
Switch, Phantom Power Supply) and  
Mini Jack Input Terminal for Wireless  
Microphone Receiver  
ꢀ
Pre Rec Function (Up to 15 Seconds)  
and Interval Rec Function  
Supports Wired Remote Control  
35 Mbps High-quality Recording Mode  
This camera recorder is equipped with a 35 Mbps  
mode for the MPEG-2 (MOV, MP4, MXF) and H.  
264 (MOV) file formats to support recording in high  
image quality.  
13  
How to use this manual  
Symbols used  
Precautions for Proper  
Use  
Caution : Describes precautions concerning the  
Storage and Usage Locations  
operation of this product.  
Memo  
:
Describesreferenceinformation, such  
as functions and usage restrictions of  
this product.  
o Allowable ambient temperature and humidity  
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable  
temperature range of 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104°F)  
and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %. Using this  
unit at a temperature or humidity outside the  
allowable ranges could result not only in  
malfunction but also serious impact on the CMOS  
elements as small white spots may be generated.  
Please exercise care during use.  
'
:
Indicates the reference page numbers  
and reference items.  
Content of this manual  
ꢀ
Illustrated designs, specifications and other  
contents of this manual are subject to change  
for improvement without prior notice.  
o Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism  
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the  
colors may be incorrect if this unit is used near a  
radio or television transmitting antenna, in places  
where strong magnetic fields are generated by  
transformers, motors, etc., or near devices emitting  
radio waves, such as transceivers or cellular  
phones.  
ꢀ
AVCHD and the AVCHD logo are trademarks  
of Panasonic Corporation and Sony  
Corporation.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
XDCAM EX is a trademark of Sony  
Corporation.  
SDXC and SDHC logos are trademarks of  
SD-3C, LLC.  
o Use of wireless microphone near this unit  
When a wireless microphone or wireless  
microphone tuner is used near this unit during  
recording, the tuner could pick up noise.  
o Avoid using or placing this unit in the following  
places.  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
and 6 are trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing, LLC.  
ꢀ
QuickTime, Final Cut Pro, iPhone, iPad, iPod  
touch, iOS, Mac OS and Safari are trademarks  
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Places subject to extreme heat or cold  
Places with excessive dirt or dust  
Places with high humidity or moisture  
Places subject to smoke or vapor such as near  
a cooking stove  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Android and Google Chrome are trademarks  
and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.  
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso  
Wave Incorporated.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable  
surfaces  
Dolby and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows  
Vista, Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are  
either registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a  
heater for long hours  
o Do not place this unit at places that are subject  
to radiation or X-rays, or where corrosive gases  
occur.  
o Protect this unit from being splashed with water.  
(Especially when shooting in the rain)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Mozilla and Firefox are either trademarks or  
registeredtrademarksofMozillaFoundationin  
the United States and/or other countries.  
Intel Core 2 Duo is a trademark or registered  
trademark of Intel Corporation or its  
subsidiaries in the United States and other  
countries.  
o Protect this unit from getting wet when shooting  
on a beach. In addition, salt and sand may adhere  
to the body. Be sure to clean the unit after use.  
o Protect this unit against penetration of dust when  
using it in a place subject to sandy dust.  
ꢀ
Other product and company names included  
in this instruction manual are trademarks and/  
or registered trademarks of their respective  
companies. Marks such as ™ and ® have  
been omitted in this manual.  
14  
Transportation  
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)  
Do not drop or hit this unit against a hard object  
Under normal environment, dust will accumulate  
on the camera recorder when it is used over a long  
period. Dust may enter the camera recorder  
especially if it is used outdoors. This may affect the  
image and sound quality of the camera recorder.  
Check and replace the fan after every 9000 hours  
(suggested guideline).  
when transporting.  
Power Saving  
When this unit is not in use, be sure to set the  
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “OFF(CHG)” in  
order to reduce power consumption.  
You can check the usage time of the fan in  
[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[System Information]ꢀ-ꢀ[Fan Hour].  
(' P111 [ Fan Hour ] )  
Maintenance  
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours without  
replacement, “FAN MAINTENANCE REQUIRED”  
will be displayed every time you turn on the power.  
o Turn off the power before performing any  
maintenance.  
o Wipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft  
cloth. Donotwipethebodywithbenzeneorthinner.  
Doing so may cause the surface to melt or turn  
cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak the cloth in  
a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the body with  
it, and then use a clean cloth to remove the  
detergent.  
SDHC/SDXC Cards  
o SDHC/SDXC card is referred to as “SD card” in  
this manual.  
o This camera recorder saves the recorded  
images and audio sound on the SD card (sold  
separately) in the card slot.  
Rechargeable Battery  
o Use an SD card (4 GB to 128 GB) with Class 6  
or higher performance, formatted using this  
camera recorder.  
o Be sure to use only the specified batteries.  
We do not guarantee the safety and performance  
of this device if an unspecified battery is used.  
o The battery is not charged when purchased.  
o When using the battery in a low temperature  
environment (10°C/50 °F or below), the operating  
time may be shortened, or it may not function  
properly. When using the device outdoors in the  
winter weather, warm the battery, such as by  
placing it in the pocket, before attaching it.  
o Do not expose the battery to excessive heat,  
such as direct sunlight or fire.  
o Depending on the recording format, SD card with  
Class 4 or higher performance can also be used.  
(' P45 [Selecting System Definition, File  
Format and Video Format] )  
* Using cards other than those from Panasonic,  
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording  
failure or data loss.  
o If the SD card contains files recorded by devices  
other than this camera recorder or files that are  
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be  
shorter or data may not be properly recorded. In  
addition, the remaining space on the card may not  
increase even when files are deleted using a PC.  
o If the battery is not to be used for a long time  
ꢀ
Use up the charge completely and detach it from  
thecameratopreventdeterioration. (Waitforthe  
battery to run out by itself such as through  
continuous shooting or playback.)  
Handling of SD Cards  
ꢀ
Charge the battery once every half a year, and  
store it again after using up the charge.  
o The status indicator lights up in red when data  
o Store the removed battery in a dry place between  
15 °C and 25 °C (59 °F and 77 °F).  
o ATTENTION:  
on the SD card is being accessed.  
Do not remove the SD card during data access  
(suchasrecording, playback, orformatting). Donot  
turn off the power or remove the battery and AC  
adapter during access either.  
The product you have purchased  
is powered by a rechargeable  
battery that is recyclable.  
o Do not use or store the SD card in a place that is  
subject to static electricity or electrical noise.  
o Do not place the SD card near locations that are  
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio waves.  
o Inserting the SD card incorrectly may result in  
damage of this unit or the SD card.  
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for  
information on how to recycle this  
battery.  
15  
o We are not liable for any accidental loss of data  
stored on the SD card. Please back up any  
important data.  
Others  
o Do not insert objects other than the memory card  
into the card slot.  
o Make use of the SD card within the prescribed  
conditions of use.  
o Do not block the vent on the unit.  
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and  
may lead to burns and fires.  
Do not use it at the following locations.  
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high  
humidity or corrosion, places near thermal  
equipment, sandy or dusty places, or in a car under  
the sun with the doors and windows closed.  
o Do not bend or drop the SD card, or subject it to  
strong impact or vibration.  
o Do not turn off the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]  
switch or remove the power cable during recording  
or playback.  
o The camera recorder may not show stable  
pictures for a few seconds immediately after the  
power is turned on, but this is not a malfunction.  
o When the video signal output terminals are not  
in use, put on the covers to prevent damage to the  
terminals.  
o Do not splash the SD card with water.  
o Do not dismantle or modify the SD card.  
o Do not touch the terminals with your hands or  
with a metal object.  
o Do not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact  
or vibration as it is a precision equipment.  
o Optical performance of lens  
o Do not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects  
to adhere to the terminals.  
o Do not remove the labels or stick other labels or  
stickers on the SD cards.  
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color  
divergence phenomena (magnification chromatic  
aberration) may occur at the periphery of the  
image. This is not a camera malfunction.  
o Noise may appear in the image when switching  
modes.  
o Do not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on  
the SD cards. Always use oil-based pens.  
o If you format (initialize) the SD card, all data  
recorded on the card, including video data and  
setup files, will be deleted.  
o If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will  
deteriorate.  
o You are recommended to use cards that are  
formatted (initialized) on this camera recorder.  
o Use the supplied AC adapter as the power  
supply. Do not use the supplied AC adapter on  
other devices.  
ꢀ
The SD card may be damaged if the camera  
recorder is not operated correctly. Formatting  
(Initializing) the SD card may allow it to operate  
correctly.  
o When the connectors that come with connector  
covers are not in use, put on the covers to prevent  
damage to the connectors.  
ꢀ
SD cards that have been formatted (initialized)  
on other cameras, computers or peripheral  
equipment may not operate correctly. In this  
case, format (initialize) the SD card on this  
camera recorder.  
o If you want to wipe out all information by  
completely erasing the data, we recommend either  
using commercially available software that is  
specially designed for that purpose, or by  
physically destroying the SD card with a hammer,  
etc. When formatting or erasing data using the  
camera recorder, only the file administration  
information is changed. The data is not completely  
erased from the SD card.  
o Some commercially available SD cards may be  
harder to be removed from this unit. Remove them  
by hooking onto the groove on the cards.  
ꢀ
It will be easier to remove the cards after several  
times.  
ꢀ
Do not stick any stickers on the cards.  
Groove  
.
o The SD card may pop out when it is being  
removed. Be careful not to lose the card.  
16  
About GPS  
Copyright  
o The GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites  
are managed by the Department of State of the  
U.S., and its precision may be altered intentionally.  
o Perform positioning at an unobstructed location  
with a clear view that is not indoors or blocked by  
trees.  
Any recordings made on this camera recorder that  
are played back for profit or public preview may  
infringe on the rights of the owner of the recordings.  
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than  
personal enjoyment without prior consent from the  
owner.  
o The time needed for obtaining the position  
information may be longer and variation may also  
be larger depending on the surrounding  
environment and time of day.  
License Notices  
o MPEGLA AVC  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC  
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE  
PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER  
USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE  
REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN  
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD  
(“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO  
THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER  
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR  
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER  
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO  
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED  
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL  
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM  
MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE  
o This camera recorder uses the WGS 84 World  
Geodetic System.  
o Signal from GPS satellites may be interrupted by  
communication signal from electronic devices  
such as mobile phones.  
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder  
o The LCD monitor and viewfinder screen are  
manufactured using high-precision technology.  
Black spots may appear on the LCD monitor and  
viewfinder screen, or red, blue, and/or white spots  
may not disappear. However, this is not a  
malfunction and these spots are not recorded on  
the SD card.  
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM  
o If you use this unit continuously for a long period  
of time, the characters displayed in the viewfinder  
may temporarily remain on the screen. This is not  
recorded on the SD card. They will not appear after  
you turn the power off and then on again.  
o If you use this unit in a cold place, the images  
may appear to lag on the screen, but this is not a  
malfunction. Retained images are not recorded on  
the SD card.  
o MPEGLA MPEG-2 Patent  
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER  
OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT  
COMPLIESWITHTHEMPEG-2STANDARDFOR  
ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR  
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY  
PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER  
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2  
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS  
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S.  
Fiddlers Green circle, Suite 400E, Greenwood  
Village, Colorado 80111 U.S.A.  
o Do not press against the surface with force or  
subject it to strong impact. Doing so may damage  
or break the screens.  
o Noise may appear in the viewfinder when  
switching between the live video and playback  
images.  
Encryption in Network Connection  
o Due to the characteristic of the viewfinder display  
device, colors may appear on the images when you  
blink your eyes. It does not affect the recorded  
images, SDI output, or HDMI output.  
Wireless LAN connections make use of an  
encryption function.  
This encryption is designed for commercially-sold  
equipment, and it cannot be altered.  
17  
Operation Modes  
This camera recorder has four operation modes - Camera mode, Media mode, USB mode and Remote  
Edit mode.  
.
[MODE] Button  
Media Mode  
Camera  
Mode  
Playback  
(Playback/Pause/  
Frame-by-Frame/  
Fast Forward/Rewind/  
Clip Jump)  
Playback  
Button  
Thumbnail  
Display  
Press and hold  
[MODE] button  
Stop  
Button  
USB Connection (When the  
confirmation to change to  
USB mode appears and  
[Change] is selected)  
When [Change] is selected on  
the confirmation screen to  
switch to the Remote Edit mode  
during access via a browser  
USB Mode  
(USB Mass Storage Class)  
Connection disabled on PC  
Remote Edit Mode  
During a mode switch operation on the  
camera or after ending the editing of clip  
metadata at the terminal  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
MODE  
CANCEL  
Playback Button  
Stop Button  
18  
Operation Mode  
Camera Mode  
Description  
ꢀ
ꢀ
This is the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera  
mode when the power is turned on.  
Camera images are output on the viewfinder and LCD monitor. When a  
recordable SD card is inserted, the camera recorder enters the recording  
standby mode. “STBY” appears on the operation mode display area of the  
LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Playback of SD card is not possible in Camera mode. However, you can  
check the most recently recorded video clip.  
(' P71 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Media Mode  
USB Mode  
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the SD card.  
When a playable SD card is inserted, the thumbnail or playback screen is  
displayed on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.  
ꢀ
Press the [MODE] selection button to enter Media mode when you are not  
shooting in Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in Media mode,  
thumbnails of the selected media slot are displayed.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
This mode allows you to connect to a PC and transfer the files on an SD card  
to the PC.  
When the camera recorder is connected to a USB cable, the message  
“Change to USB Mode?” appears.  
Select [Change] and press the Set button to switch to USB mode.  
(' P132 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )  
ꢀ
In USB mode, the camera recorder is recognized by the connected PC as a  
peripheral drive. (USB mass storage class only)  
Disable the connection on the PC and remove the USB cable from the camera  
recorder to switch to Camera mode.  
(' P132 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When a USB cable is connected during recording, the message appears after  
recording stops.  
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed  
automatically, such as when playback stops.  
Files on the PC cannot be written to the SD card.  
Remote Edit Mode  
Thisisamodeforaccessingthepageforeditingthemetadatathatisrecorded  
in a clip via a browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or  
PC.  
ꢀ
When you access via a browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet  
terminal, or PC, a “Change to Remote Edit Mode?” message will appear on  
the display screen of the camera recorder.  
Select [Change], and press the Set button to switch to the Remote Edit mode  
for editing the clip’s metadata.  
(' P146 [ Clip Metadata ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
If you access via a browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,  
or PC while recording is in progress, the message appears after recording  
stops.  
ꢀ
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed  
automatically, such as when playback stops.  
19  
Names of Parts  
A B C D  
E
F
G
F
F
O
AR  
V
IX  
F
/3  
X
U
L
O
L
IS/2  
O
/1  
T
SSIS  
A
S
U
C
O
F
ER  
W
PO  
E
D
O
C
E
IM  
T
ON  
B
M
U
H
/T  
K
U
N
E
M
FF  
(CHG)  
O
O
T
U
A
Bottom  
MODE  
T
U
N
A
SLO  
A/B  
M
4
/6  
1
∞
6
/1  
1
KER/6  
AR  
M
A/5  
R
ZEBR  
E
T
T
U
TO  
L
T
H
S
CK/4  
U
A
E
H
C
1/4  
N
L
AE LO  
SH  
A
C
IN  
A
B
U
P
W
TO  
U
A
G
L
FULL  
A
F
F
N
O
O
H
IS  
F
F
IR  
O
B
A E  
T
E
S
R
P
O
M
H
T
U
A
H
S
U
P
ZOOM  
SERVO MANUAL  
J
I
.
A
B
J
Built-in Microphone  
[ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] Zoom Operation  
Servo/Manual Switch  
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )  
Set to “SERVO” when using the zoom lever at  
Tally Lamp  
the grip j or the zoom lever at the handle a.  
(' P38 [Tally Lamp] )  
(' P160 [Tally Lamp] )  
(' P47 [Zoom Operation] )  
K
L
Monitor Speaker  
C
D
E
Microphone Holder  
(' P86 [Audio Output during Playback] )  
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )  
Viewfinder  
Microphone Holder Lock Knob  
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and  
Viewfinder] )  
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )  
Shoe  
M
N
Visibility Adjustment Lever  
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and  
Viewfinder] )  
For mounting separately sold lights and  
accessories.  
F
[FIX/VAR/OFF] Zoom Speed Switch  
Eyecup  
(' P47 [Zoom Operation] )  
Prevents external light from entering the  
viewfinder screen and cameraman’s vision.  
(' P27 [Attaching the Large Eyecup] )  
For switching the zoom speed of the zoom lever  
a at the handle.  
G
H
Accessory Mounting Screw Hole  
O
P
Battery  
Tripod Mounting Hole  
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )  
(' P27 [Attaching the Tripod] )  
[+] Headphone Jack (Φ3.5 mm)  
(' P62 [Monitoring Audio Sound During  
Recording Using a Headphone] )  
[AUX] AUX Input Terminal (Φ3.5 mm)  
For connecting to receiver such as wireless  
microphone.  
I
[REC] Record Trigger Button  
Starts/stops recording.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Q
This button is interlocked with the [REC] button  
R on the grip and the [REC/HOLD] button Z at  
the top of the handle.  
20  
dc b a Z  
REC  
T
W
HOLD  
Y
1
T
U
P
IN  
2
T
U
P
IN  
X
W
L
M
N
IN  
OUT  
B
A
T
T
.R  
E
L
E
A
S
E
X
U
A
V
U
A
TC  
P
/
O
W
G
E
R
CH  
R
E
C
D
E
V
I
C
E
A
V
H
D
D
I
/S  
D
S
B
H
D
M
I
RE  
MO  
TE  
H
O
S
T
D
C
O
PQ R S T  
.
R
Y
[REC] Record Trigger Button  
Starts/stops recording.  
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2  
(XLR 3-pin x 2)  
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Z
[REC/HOLD] Record Trigger Button/Lock  
Switch  
This button is interlocked with the [REC] button  
I at the bottom of the lens and the [REC/  
HOLD] button Z at the top of the handle.  
Starts/stops recording.  
Set the switch to [HOLD] to lock the [REC]  
Trigger button.  
S
[C.REVIEW/7] Clip Review/User 7 Button  
For checking the most recently captured  
images.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
This button is interlocked with the [REC] button  
R on the grip and the [REC] button I at the  
bottom of the lens.  
(' P71 [Viewing Recorded Videos  
Immediately (Clip Review)] )  
You can also use it as a user button by assigning  
a specific feature in the menu setting to this  
button.  
ꢀ
The [REC] button R on the grip and the [REC]  
button I at the bottom of the lens will not be  
locked.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] )  
a
b
Zoom lever at the Handle  
(' P47 [Using the Zoom Lever at the  
Handle] )  
T
Zoom Lever at the Grip  
To operate zoom servo with the zoom lever at  
the grip, set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL]  
Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)  
switch 0 to “SERVO”.  
For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).  
(' P47 [Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip] )  
Caution :  
U
V
[TC] TC Input/Output Terminal  
(' P63 [Time Code and User’s Bit] )  
[IN/OUT] TC IN/OUT Selection Switch  
(' P67 [Synchronizing Time Code on  
Another Camera] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength  
to withstand the weight of this camera recorder.  
If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the  
camera recorder may fall and cause injuries.  
Check the instruction manual provided with the  
shoulder belt before using.  
W
X
Hood Release Button  
c
d
(' P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )  
[POWER/CHG] Power/Charging Display Lamp  
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )  
[BATT. RELEASE]BatteryLockReleaseButton  
(' P29 [Removing the Battery] )  
External Microphone Cable Clamp  
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )  
21  
Side Control Panel  
UT S R Q P  
L
M
[ZEBRA/5] Zebra/User 5 Button  
(' P68 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )  
You can also use it as a user button by assigning  
a specific feature in the menu setting to this  
button.  
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
OIS  
/
2
LOLUX  
/
3
A
TIME CODE  
MENU/THUMB  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] )  
ND FILTER  
FOCUS  
AE LEVEL  
AUTO  
MANU  
POWER  
1/64  
ON  
1/16  
1/4  
O
N
[MARKER/6] Marker/User 6 Button  
This button toggles ON/OFF the marker, safety  
zone, and center mark displays.  
You can also use it as a user button by assigning  
a specific feature in the menu setting to this  
button.  
B
C
OFF  
(CHG)  
PUSH AUTO  
IRIS  
OFF  
MODE  
CANCEL  
GAIN  
WHT BAL SHUTTER  
FULL AUTO  
ON  
AE LOCK/4  
ZEBRA/5  
MARKER/6  
D
E
PUSH AUTO  
L
M
H
B
A
PRESET  
OFF  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] )  
F
G
I J K L M  
N
O
H
[MODE] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button  
.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )  
A
[FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] Focus Switch  
(' P48 [Focus Operation] )  
[ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch  
(' P56 [Setting the ND Filter] )  
[PUSH AUTO] Focus Push Auto Button  
(' P49 [One Push Auto Focus] )  
[IRIS] Iris Auto/Manual Selection Button  
(' P52 [Adjusting the Iris] )  
[PUSH AUTO] Iris Push Auto Button  
(' P52 [Adjusting the Iris] )  
[GAIN] Gain Auto/Manual Selection Button / [L/  
M /H] Sensitivity Selection Switch  
(' P53 [Setting the Gain] )  
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] Lock Power ON/OFF  
Switch  
B
C
D
E
F
Turns ON/OFF the power.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Holddownthelockbutton(blue)inthecenter  
to toggle ON/OFF.  
When the power is turning OFF, “P.OFF”  
appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the  
power again.  
P
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button (R)  
The function changes according to the  
operation status of the camera recorder.  
o During menu operation (all modes)  
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )  
Center Set button (R) : Confirms menu items  
and setting values  
G
H
[WHT BAL] White Balance Auto/Manual  
Selection Button / [B/A/PRESET] Selection  
Switch  
Cross-shaped button  
:
Selects menu items  
and setting values  
(JK)  
(' P56 [Adjusting the White Balance] )  
o During Camera mode  
Shutter operation:  
[SHUTTER] Shutter Speed Auto/Manual  
Selection Button  
Center Set button (R) : Shutter ON/OFF  
Cross-shaped button  
:
Switches shutter  
speed when shutter  
is ON  
(' P54 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )  
(JK)  
I
J
[,] One Push Auto White Balance Button  
[FULL AUTO ON/OFF] Full Auto Switch  
(' P51 [Adjusting the Brightness  
Automatically] )  
AE level operation  
:
Cross-shaped button  
(HI)  
Memo :  
ꢀ
(' P59 [Automatic White Balance Mode  
(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)] )  
When [Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[AE LEVEL SW] is  
set to “AE LEVEL/VFR”, the cross-shaped  
button (HI) is used to set the number of frames  
during Variable Frame Rec.  
K
[AE LOCK/4] AE Lock/User 4 Button  
When Gain, Iris, and Shutter are set to “AUTO”,  
their respective values and the value of white  
balance are locked when the [AE LOCK/4] button  
is pressed.  
(' P81 [Variable Frame Rec] )  
(' P96 [ AE LEVEL SW ] )  
Q
[LOLUX/3] Low-light Shooting/User 3 Button  
For switching the low-light shooting mode ON  
or OFF.  
You can also use it as a user button by assigning  
a specific feature in the menu setting to this  
button.  
You can also use it as a user button by assigning  
a specific feature in the menu setting to this  
button.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] )  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] )  
22  
Rear Terminal  
R
[OIS/2] Optical Image Stabilizer/User 2 Button  
For switching the image stabilizer feature mode  
ON or OFF.  
You can also use it as a user button by assigning  
a specific feature in the menu setting to this  
button.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] )  
A
B
C
D
S
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Focus Assist/User 1 Button  
For switching the focus assist function ON or  
OFF.  
DEVICE  
AV  
BATT.RELEASE  
A
POWER  
/CHG  
DEVICE  
AV  
OPEN  
HD/SD  
SDI  
(' P49 [Focus Assist Function] )  
You can also use it as a user button by assigning  
a specific feature in the menu setting to this  
button.  
HOST  
CLOSE  
HDMI  
REMOTE  
B
E
F
G
REMOTE  
DC  
DC  
HOST  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] )  
.
A
B
C
D
E
[DEVICE] USB Mini Terminal  
T
[MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button  
(' P132 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )  
ꢀ
Displays the menu screen during Camera  
mode.  
[AV] AV Output Terminal  
(' P134 [Connecting External Monitor] )  
[HD/SD SDI] SDI Output Terminal (BNC)  
(' P134 [Connecting External Monitor] )  
[HDMI] HDMI Output Terminal  
(' P134 [Connecting External Monitor] )  
[HOST] USB Host Terminal  
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )  
ꢀ
Displays the menu screen when the button  
is pressed during thumbnail display in the  
Media mode.  
ꢀ
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail  
screen when the button is pressed during  
playback screen display in the Media mode.  
U
[CANCEL] Cancel Button  
Cancels various settings and stops playback.  
For connecting an USB adapter according to  
the intended purpose when you are connecting  
the unit to a network.  
SD Slot  
(' P137 [Camera Setup for Network  
Connection] )  
[REMOTE] Remote Terminal  
(' P136 [Connecting Wired Remote Control] )  
(' P39 [SD Card] )  
F
G
[DC] DC Input Terminal  
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply.  
Connects with the bundled AC adapter.  
(' P30 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )  
D
C
A
B
.
A
B
SD Card Cover  
[SLOT A/B] Card Slot Selection Button  
For switching the active card slot during  
shooting and playback.  
C
D
Card Slot B Status Indicator  
Card Slot A Status Indicator  
23  
LCD Monitor  
F
G
[LCD BRIGHT +/-] LCD Display Brightness  
Adjustment Button  
(' P36 [Adjusting the Brightness] )  
A
[PEAKING +/-] LCD/VF Contour Adjustment  
Button  
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour (LCD)] )  
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour (Viewfinder)] )  
B
MENU/THUMB  
N M L K  
J
H
[DISPLAY] Display Button  
CH1  
CH2  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
MONITOR  
ꢀ
Press the [DISPLAY] button to switch to the  
display screen during normal screen display  
(when the menu screen is not displayed).  
INT  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
LINE  
MIC  
CH1  
BOTH  
CH2  
MIC  
C
+48V  
LCD BRIGHT PEAKING  
DISPLAY STATUS  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
D
CANCEL  
(' P34 [Display Screen] )  
CH1  
CH2  
ꢀ
Switches between [Main Menu] and  
[Favorites Menu] when the [DISPLAY]  
button is pressed while the menu screen is  
displayed.  
E
FG HI  
.
A
LCD Monitor  
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )  
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and  
I
J
[STATUS] Status Screen Display Button  
Press the [STATUS] button to display the status  
screen on the viewfinder and LCD monitor  
during normal screen display (when the menu  
screen is not displayed).  
Viewfinder] )  
[MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button  
B
ꢀ
Displays the menu screen during Camera  
mode.  
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )  
(' P35 [Status Screen] )  
ꢀ
Displays the menu screen when the button  
is pressed during thumbnail display in the  
Media mode.  
[MONITOR]/[+/-] Audio Monitor Selection  
Switch/Volume Adjustment Button  
Switches the audio monitor and adjusts the  
monitor speaker/headphone.  
ꢀ
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail  
screen when the button is pressed during  
playback screen display in the Media mode.  
(' P62 [Monitoring Audio Sound During  
Recording Using a Headphone] )  
C
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button  
K
L
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Signal Selection  
(R)  
The function changes according to the  
operation status of the camera recorder.  
Switch  
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )  
ꢀ
During menu operation (all modes)  
[CH2] CH2 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch  
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH2.  
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )  
[CH1] CH1 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch  
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )  
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )  
Center Set button (R) : Confirms menu  
items and setting  
M
N
values  
Cross-shaped button  
:
Selects menu  
items and setting  
values  
(JK)  
[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] CH1/CH2 Audio  
Recording Mode Switch  
ꢀ
During Camera mode  
(' P61 [Adjusting Audio Recording Level] )  
You can also use it as a user button by assigning  
a specific feature in the menu setting to this  
button.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User  
Buttons] )  
D
E
[CANCEL] Cancel Button  
Cancels various settings and stops playback.  
[CH1/CH2] CH1/CH2 Recording Level  
Adjustment Knob  
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )  
24  
Lens Section  
A
B
C
D
E
.
A
Filter Built-In Screw  
ꢀ
Transparent or UV filter for lens protection,  
or filters for various effects can be installed.  
Installable filter types: Φ72mmP0.75  
ꢀ
Memo :  
ꢀ
Remove the lens hood when installing the filter.  
(' P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )  
B
C
D
Lens Cover Open/Close Switch  
(' P28 [Opening/Closing the Lens Cover] )  
Focus Ring  
(' P48 [Focus Operation] )  
Zoom Ring  
(' P47 [Zoom Operation] )  
To operate zoom with this ring, set the [ZOOM  
SERVO/MANUAL] switch to “MANUAL”.  
E
Iris Ring  
(' P52 [Adjusting the Iris] )  
To operate auto iris, press the [IRIS] button on  
the side control panel.  
(ꢀ mark appears on the screen)  
25  
Basic System Diagram  
GY-HM650U/GY-HM650E  
Shoulder Belt  
Monitor  
Earphone  
Wireless Microphone Receiver  
Microphone  
[TC]  
[AUX]  
[HOST]  
Network Adapter  
Monitor  
SDI Cable BNC  
GY-HM650U/GY-HM650E  
HDMI Cable  
AV Cable  
RCA Pin  
Battery  
AC Adapter  
Remote Control Unit  
USB Cable  
Carrying Case  
Tripod  
Non-linear Editing  
System  
SDHC/SDXC  
Memory Card  
SDHC/SDXC  
Card Reader  
.
26  
Attaching the Tripod  
Settings and Adjustments  
Before Use  
Use the screw hole at the bottom of this camera  
recorder.  
(3/8×16UNC, 1/4×20UNC)  
.
Use the screw hole that suits the tripod.  
To prevent the camera recorder from falling off,  
which may result in injuries or damages, read the  
instruction manual of the tripod to be used and  
make sure that it is securely attached.  
Adjusting the Grip Belt  
Open the pad and adjust the position of the grip belt  
accordingly.  
1
T
U
P
IN  
2
T
U
P
IN  
BA  
TT  
.R  
EL  
EA  
SE  
X
AU  
A
P
/CH  
OW  
ER  
G
R
E
C
D
E
V
IC  
E
A
V
H
D/  
S
D
S
B
DI  
H
D
M
I
R
E
M
O
T
E
o Bottom  
HOS  
T
D
C
.
Caution :  
ꢀ
If the grip is loose, the camera recorder may fall  
off resulting in injuries or malfunction.  
.
ꢀ
Caution :  
Attaching an External Microphone  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Use the tripod on a stable surface.  
To prevent the camera recorder from falling,  
attach securely using the rotation prevention  
hole.  
You can attach a separately sold microphone to the  
microphone holder.  
ꢀ
Use screws with screw length 5 mm and below.  
1, 3  
ꢀ
2
Attaching the Large Eyecup  
ꢀ
Attach the large eyecup to prevent external light  
from entering the viewfinder screen and  
cameraman’s vision.  
4
ꢀ
ꢀ
Align and attach to the groove of the eyecup  
mounted on the camera recorder.  
The large eyecup can be attached in any  
direction.  
5
.
Large Eyecup (supplied)  
Eyecup  
ꢀ
Turn the knob on the microphone holder  
anticlockwise to loosen and open the  
microphone holder.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢃ
Place the microphone in the microphone  
holder.  
Turn the knob on the microphone holder  
clockwise to secure the microphone.  
.
Connect the microphone cable to the  
Memo :  
[INPUT1] or [INPUT2] terminal.  
ꢀ
Do not remove the eyecup that is premounted  
ꢄ
ꢅ
Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.  
on the camera recorder.  
Perform the settings for the microphone  
correctly.  
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )  
27  
Detaching the Hood  
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover  
ꢀ
Remove the hood when attaching a filter,  
teleconverter or wide converter to the front of the  
lens.  
Use the lens cover open/close switch to open or  
close the lens cover.  
Before shooting, open the lens cover.  
When this camera recorder is not in use, close the  
lens cover to protect the lens.  
ꢀ
While pressing the hood release button, turn the  
hood in the anti-clockwise direction to remove it.  
.
Caution :  
.
ꢀ
Do not press against the lens cover with force.  
Doing so may damage the lens or the cover.  
ꢀ
Power Supply  
Attaching/Detaching the Hood  
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a  
battery pack or connect an AC adapter to it.  
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )  
Attaching the Hood  
Align the markings on the camera recorder and  
hood;turnthehoodinthedirectionofthearrowuntil  
it is locked.  
(' P30 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )  
Caution :  
ꢀ
Set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to  
“OFF(CHG)” before changing the power supply  
that operates this camera recorder.  
ꢀ
Using a Battery Pack  
Charging the Battery  
Charge the battery immediately after purchase or  
when the battery power is running low.  
* The battery is not charged when purchased.  
2
4
.
POWER  
/CHG  
3
POWER  
MODE  
1
ON  
OFF  
(CHG)  
4
.
28  
Caution :  
ꢀ
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the  
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch  
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.  
ꢀ
Do not remove the battery when the [POWER  
ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is “ON”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not insert or remove the DC cable when the  
battery is in use.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Attach the supplied battery.  
Slide it in until you hear a click.  
Leaving the camera recorder unused with the  
battery inside will deplete the battery power  
even if you set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]  
switch to “OFF(CHG)”. Remove the battery if  
you are not using the camera recorder.  
Connect the supplied AC adapter to the  
[DC] terminal.  
Openthecoverofthe[DC]terminalandconnect  
as shown in the diagram.  
ꢃ
Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet.  
ꢀ
The [POWER/CHG] lamp blinks during  
charging and will go out after charging is  
complete.  
Estimated Charging and Continuous  
Operating Times  
o Charging Time (supplied SSL-JVC50 battery  
ꢀ
Remove the AC adapter after charging is  
complete.  
pack)  
Approx. 4 h  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Memo :  
Blinking of the [POWER/CHG] lamp during  
charging indicates the charge level.  
ꢀ
Use up the charge completely before you  
charge the battery. If the battery is not fully  
discharged before charging, the battery  
capacity may drop after repeated cycles.  
If the battery capacity drops due to repetitive  
shallow charging and discharging, it may be  
recovered by using up the charge completely  
and then fully charging the battery again.  
If you charge the battery immediately after using  
while the battery is still warm, it may not be fully  
charged.  
[POWER/CHG] Lamp  
Charge Level  
Orange blinking (4 times per Less than 25%  
ꢀ
second)  
Orange blinking (3 times per Less than 50%  
second)  
Orange blinking (2 times per Less than 75%  
ꢀ
ꢀ
second)  
Orange blinking (1 time per Less than 100%  
second)  
It is recommended that you charge the battery  
in an environment between 10 °C and 35 °C  
(50ꢀ°F and 95 °F). The battery may not be fully  
charged or the charging time may be prolonged  
if charged under low temperatures (below 10 °C/  
50 °F).  
Light goes out  
Fully charged  
Removing the Battery  
o Continuous Operating Time (supplied SSL-  
JVC50 battery pack)  
2
Approx. 1 hrs 50 mins  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Actual operating times may differ depending on  
the age of the battery, charging condition, and  
operating environment.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Operating time is shortened in cold  
environment.  
POWER  
1
The operating time may shorten when power  
zoom is used, accessories are connected, or  
when the LCD monitor is frequently used.  
For purchase of spare batteries and battery  
charger, consult your nearest JVC dealer.  
ON  
OFF  
(CHG)  
MODE  
ꢀ
.
ꢀ
ꢁ
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the  
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch  
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.  
While pressing and holding the [BATT.  
RELEASE] button, push up and remove the  
battery in the direction of the arrow.  
Precautions for Batteries  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Store the battery in a cool and dry place when  
not in use. Do not expose the battery to high  
temperatures (such as in a car under direct  
sunlight). This will cause battery leakage and  
shorten the battery life.  
If the operating time shortens drastically even  
after charging, the battery may be reaching the  
end of its life. Replace the battery with a new  
one.  
29  
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)  
Power Status Display  
Viewfinder Screen and LCD Monitor  
UsethesuppliedACadaptertooperatethecamera  
recorder with AC power.  
The power status is displayed on the display and  
menu screens.  
Display  
Description  
)ꢀ7.4V  
)ꢀ100min  
4ꢀ30%  
&
Currently powered by a battery.  
When the battery power runs out,  
the battery mark appears hollow,  
and “RES” (yellow) is displayed.  
POWER  
2
ON  
1
Memo :  
ꢀ
OFF  
(CHG)  
You can set the display using  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Battery].  
MODE  
(' P105 [ Battery ] )  
.
ꢀ
Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to  
the [DC] terminal of the camera recorder.  
ꢁ
Currently powered by an AC  
adapter.  
ꢀ
Check that the power switch of the camera  
recorder is set to “OFF(CHG)”.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold  
separately) is not used, the battery mark which  
indicates the battery level may not appear.  
ꢀ
Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and  
connect as shown in the diagram.  
ꢁ
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the  
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch  
to set to “ON”.  
Display Screen  
(' P120 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )  
(' P125 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )  
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
282min  
100min  
50min  
00:00:00.00  
Do not insert or remove the DC cable during  
recording.  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
ꢀ
Do not use power supply of high voltage  
fluctuation, containing noise such as ripple, or  
with insufficient capacity.  
1920x1080  
60i HQ  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
Charging the Built-In Battery  
.
ꢀ
The date/time and time code data are stored  
using the built-in rechargeable battery.  
When power is connected to the camera  
recorder, the built-in battery always gets  
charged. When the power is disconnected, the  
battery gradually discharges.  
Menu Screen  
(' P92 [Display and Description of the Menu  
Screen] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The battery will be totally discharged if left  
unused for 3 months and the date/time and time  
code data will be reset. When this happens, set  
the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “ON” to  
display the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the  
date/time.  
(' P32 [Initial Settings] )  
.
30  
Warnings by Lamp and Warning Tone  
Turning Off the Power  
Warning status is indicated by tally lamp and  
warning tone.  
Sets the camera recorder to the recording standby  
or stop mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The tally lamp blinks.  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the  
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch  
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.  
Remove the battery and the power to the  
[DC] terminal (when not in use for a long  
time).  
The warning tone is output from the monitor  
speaker or [+] terminal.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
If you continue to use the camera recorder while  
the power warning is displayed, the camera  
recorder will stop automatically when the battery  
or supplied voltage from the AC adapter  
becomes lower.  
Auto Power Off function  
Caution :  
When [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Auto Power Off] is set to “On”,  
the power turns off automatically when the camera  
recorder is not operated for 5 minutes or longer  
while running on battery.  
ꢀ
The remaining battery power and time are  
displayed as they are from the battery  
information. Accuratedatamaynotbedisplayed  
depending on the battery condition. Replace the  
battery as soon as possible when the remaining  
battery power and time are low.  
(' P110 [ Auto Power Off ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When both the battery and AC adapter are  
connected, power from the AC adapter  
connection will be used. As such, the [Auto  
Power Off] function will not have any effect.  
Turning On/Off the Power  
Turning On the Power  
Caution :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch  
to “OFF(CHG)” during recording. Check that the  
operation mode display is “STBY” or “STOP”  
before you turn off the power.  
ꢀ
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the  
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch  
to set to “ON”.  
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode  
and is ready for shooting.  
If you have mistakenly set the [POWER ON/  
OFF(CHG)] switch to “OFF(CHG)” during  
recording, wait for 5 seconds or more before you  
turn on the power again.  
Memo :  
When turning off the power, first set the  
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch of the camera  
recorder to “OFF(CHG)”. Do not remove the  
battery or turn off the AC power while the  
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set to “ON”.  
ꢀ
The camera recorder always start up in Camera  
mode when the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]  
switch is set to “ON”. Use the [MODE] button at  
the side of the camera recorder to switch mode.  
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
(CHG)  
MODE  
.
31  
ꢁ
Initial Settings  
Ensure that the lens cover is closed, and  
press the Set button (R).  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Self-diagnosis starts.  
When the power is first turned on, the Initial Setting  
screen for performing the initial settings in the  
camera recorder appears.  
A progress bar appears, and “Complete  
Diagnosis” appears when the diagnosis is  
complete.  
Set the date/time of the built-in clock in the [Initial  
Setting] screen.  
All operations are disabled until initial settings are  
complete.  
MENU/THUMB  
CANCEL  
MENU/THUMB  
POWER  
AE LEVEL  
ON  
OFF  
(CHG)  
MODE  
CANCEL  
.
.
Memo :  
Memo :  
ꢀ
It is recommended to use the AC adapter as the  
ꢀ
It takes about 6 minutes to complete the  
diagnosis. During the diagnosis, do not operate  
or turn off the camera recorder.  
power supply.  
ꢀ
Be sure to close the lens cover.  
ꢂ
ꢀ
Press the Set button (R) after confirming  
the exit screen.  
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the  
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch  
to set to “ON”.  
The [Initial Setting] screen appears.  
The Initial Setting screen appears.  
ꢀ
For GY-HM650U  
.
.
ꢀ
For GY-HM650E  
.
32  
Changing the Display Style  
Memo :  
You can change the display style of the date/time  
ꢀ
The [Initial Setting] screen appears when the  
power is turned on for the first time and when the  
power is turned on after the built-in battery is fully  
discharged.  
on the menu.  
Setting the Date Display (Date Style)  
ꢀ
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )  
The date display can be changed in [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Date Style].  
The configured date/time data is saved in the  
built-in rechargeable battery even if the power is  
turned off.  
ꢃ
Set the time zone and date/time.  
Setting the Time Display (Time Style)  
A
B
ꢄ
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button  
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )  
The time display can be changed in [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Time Style].  
(HI) and select the setting item.  
Change the values with the cross-shaped  
button (JK).  
Press the Set button (R) after setting is  
Date/Time Display in Each Operation  
Mode  
complete.  
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/  
time.  
During Camera mode:  
Date/time of the built-in clock is displayed.  
During Media mode:  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The configured date/time data can be displayed  
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder and be  
recorded to the SD card.  
Shooting date/time of the clip being played back is  
displayed.  
ꢀ
The value of the year can be set in the range of  
“2000” to “2099”.  
Changing the Time after Initial Setting  
Setting the Date/Time  
(' P110 [ Date/Time ] )  
ꢀ
Select [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Date/Time].  
The [Date/Time] screen appears.  
ꢁ
A
Set the date and time.  
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button  
(HI) and select the setting item.  
B
Change the values with the cross-shaped  
button (JK).  
ꢂ
Press the Set button (R) after setting is  
complete.  
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/  
time.  
33  
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Media Mode  
Displays on the LCD  
(' P125 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )  
Monitor and Viewfinder  
ꢀ
ꢀ
This is the screen display during clip playback in  
Media Mode.  
The display switches between three screen  
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.  
(Display 0 - 1 - 2 - 0)  
You can display the camera status, media  
information, zebra pattern, and various markers in  
the video image on the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
screen during shooting.  
1000/2000  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Video Set]  
-ꢀ[Display On TV] is set to “On”, the display  
screen and menu screen are also displayed in  
the video image from the video signal output  
terminal.  
(' P106 [ Display On TV ] )  
Display 0 screen  
ꢀ
Display Screen  
1000/2000  
00:00:00.00  
1920x1080  
60i HQ  
Display Screen in Camera Mode  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The display switches between three screen  
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.  
(Display 0 - 1 - 2 - 0)  
Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the  
status screen.  
4030 20 10  
0
Display 1 screen  
282min  
1920x1080  
60i HQ  
1000/2000  
00:00:00.00  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
x5  
x5  
SELECT  
INFO  
4030 20 10  
0
Display 0 screen  
Display 2 screen  
.
00:00:00.00  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
Display 1 screen  
282min  
100min  
00:00:00.00  
50min  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
1920x1080  
60i HQ  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
Display 2 screen  
.
34  
Status Screen  
USB Mode Screen  
ꢀ
This screen allows you to check the current  
This screen displays the USB mode.  
settings.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
To display the status screen, press the  
[STATUS] button in the normal screen.  
The status display differs according to the  
operation mode (two types).  
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the  
display screen.  
Press the [MENU] button at each status screen  
(other than the [Camera Information] screen) to  
enter the setting screen.  
.
ꢀ
Remote Edit Mode Screen  
ꢀ
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to switch  
screens as follows:  
This is a mode for accessing the page for editing  
the metadata that is recorded in a clip via a browser  
on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,  
or PC.  
(' P146 [ Clip Metadata ] )  
.
ꢀ
Warning Display  
ꢀ
Warning display is displayed in the display  
screen (Camera mode, Media mode).  
If error occurs during status screen display, the  
display will return to the display screen to display  
the warning.  
ꢀ
(' P157 [Error Messages and Actions] )  
00:00:00.00  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢁ13000K  
Warning Display Area  
.
.
35  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor  
and Viewfinder  
LCD BRIGHT PEAKING  
3
Tilt 90 degrees  
You can monitor video images on this camera  
recorder using the viewfinder, LCD monitor, or  
both.  
downward  
2
Normal LCD  
Inverted  
DISPLAY  
LCD  
Tilt 180 degrees  
upward  
1
.
ꢀ
ꢁ
Open the LCD cover.  
.
Incline the LCD cover to a position that  
Displays on the LCD Monitor and  
Viewfinder Screen (VF)  
enables easy viewing.  
Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.  
ꢀ
While the LCD monitor is open, you can  
rotate it 180 degrees upward or 90 degrees  
downward.  
When [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD + VF] is set to “Off”  
(' P103 [ LCD + VF ] )  
ꢀ
Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees  
upward enables you to see the screen from  
the lens side. To display the image when it is  
viewed from the opposite direction (mirror  
image), perform setting as follows.  
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD  
Mirror] to “Mirror”ꢀ- Set button (R)  
LCD Monitor Status  
LCD closed Normal LCD OFF  
Inverted LCD ON  
LCD opened Normal LCD ON  
Inverted LCD ON  
LCD Display VF Display  
ON  
OFF *  
OFF *  
OFF *  
* Turns on when [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD + VF] is set to  
“On”.  
Memo :  
(' P103 [ LCD Mirror ] )  
ꢂ
Adjust the brightness, contour, and  
contrast of the LCD monitor.  
You can change the angle and brightness of the  
LCD monitor according to your usage condition.  
Changing the brightness of the screen will not  
affect the recorded images.  
ꢀ
Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds  
to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor.  
ꢀ
The function to switch between LCD monitor and  
viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY]  
button can be canceled by opening/closing or  
rotating the LCD monitor.  
Adjusting the Brightness  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The viewfinder screen is always displayed when  
Use the [LCD BRIGHT +/－] button to adjust the  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ ꢀ[LCD + VF] is set to “On”.  
-
brightness of the LCD monitor.  
You can display both the LCD monitor and  
viewfinder screens at the same time by setting  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The [+] button brightens the monitor and the  
[－] button darkens it.  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ ꢀ[LCD + VF] to “On”.  
-
Press the [+] and [－] buttons simultaneously  
to return to standard settings.  
(' P103 [ LCD + VF ] )  
During adjustment, the brightness level is  
displayed on the LCD monitor.  
ND 1 /64  
LCD BRIGHT  
-10  
AE+6  
18dB  
F1.8  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K 1/ 10000  
.
36  
Caution :  
Adjusting the Contour  
ꢀ
A high-definition viewfinder is used on this  
camera recorder in order to provide an accurate  
focusing environment. Due to the characteristic  
of the display device, colors may appear on the  
images when you blink your eyes. This is not a  
malfunction. It does not affect the recorded  
images, SDI output, AV output, or HDMI output.  
Use the [PEAKING +/－] button to adjust the  
contour of the LCD monitor.  
(The contour of the viewfinder screen will also  
be adjusted at the same time.)  
ꢀ
The [+] button increases contour correction  
and the [－] button decreases contour  
correction.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Press the [+] and [－] buttons simultaneously  
to return to standard settings.  
Incline the viewfinder vertically to a  
position that enables easy viewing.  
During adjustment, the contour level is  
displayed on the LCD monitor.  
ꢁ
Turn the visibility adjustment lever to  
adjust the visibility.  
Turn the visibility adjustment lever to sharpen  
the image on the viewfinder screen.  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
PEAKING  
0
ꢂ
Adjust the brightness, contour, and  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
contrast of the viewfinder screen.  
.
Adjusting the Brightness  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The [PEAKING +/-] operation is disabled in the  
Use the [VF Bright] menu to adjust the  
brightness of the viewfinder screen.  
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “-10”.  
ꢀ
Adjust using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[VF  
Bright].  
Increasing the value increases the  
brightness. [Setting Values: +10 to -10]  
(Default value: 0)  
Adjusting the Contrast  
ꢀ
Use the [LCD Contrast] menu to adjust the  
contrast of the LCD monitor.  
ꢀ
Adjust using [Main Menu]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ ꢀ[LCD  
-
Contrast].  
Adjusting the Contour  
ꢀ
Increasing the value increases the contrast.  
Use the [PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the  
contour of the viewfinder screen.  
The contour of the LCD monitor will also be  
adjusted at the same time.  
[Setting Values: +10 to -10] (Default value: 0)  
ꢀ
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour] )  
You can change the brightness and peaking of the  
viewfinder screen according to your usage  
conditions.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD + VF] is  
set to “Off”, operate after switching to the  
viewfinder display by pressing the [DISPLAY]  
button for 2 seconds or longer.  
Changing the brightness of the screen will not  
affect the recorded images.  
ꢀ
The [PEAKING +/-] operation is disabled in the  
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “-10”.  
1
Adjusting the Contrast  
PEAKING  
Use the [VF Contrast] menu to adjust the  
contrast of the viewfinder screen.  
ꢀ
Adjust using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[VF  
Contrast].  
ꢀ
Increasing the value increases the contrast.  
[Setting Values: +10 to -10] (Default value:  
0)  
2
.
37  
ꢀ
Displaying in Black and White  
Assign functions to the buttons from the  
menu.  
You can display the viewfinder screen in black  
and white.  
Set items in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera  
Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[User Switch Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[USER1]-  
[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD  
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀].  
ꢀ
[Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[VF Color] item  
- Press Set button (R) - Select “Off”ꢀ-  
Press Set button (R).  
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )  
(' P103 [ VF Color ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Operations of the user buttons are interlocked  
with the menu settings.  
Assigning Functions to  
User Buttons  
ꢀ
When the menu screen is displayed, these  
buttons function as the menu operation buttons.  
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )  
You can assign functions to the following buttons  
and use them as user buttons.  
By assigning functions to the buttons, the usability  
of the camera recorder is enhanced.  
Perform settings in the menu items corresponding  
to each button.  
Tally Lamp  
This is the indicator lamp for recording and  
warning.  
Button  
Menu Item  
[USER1]  
[USER2]  
The operation changes according to the menu  
settings.  
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button  
[OIS/2] Button  
The lamp blinks when the battery or remaining  
space on the SD card is low. (Camera mode only)  
[LOLUX/3] Button  
[USER3]  
* Set using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Tally  
Lamp].  
(' P110 [ Tally Lamp ] )  
[AE LOCK/4] Button  
[USER4]  
[ZEBRA/5] Button  
[USER5]  
[MARKER/6] Button  
[USER6]  
[C.REVIEW/7] Button  
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (J)  
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (K)  
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (H)  
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (I)  
[USER7]  
[LCD KEY▲]  
[LCD KEY▼]  
[LCD KEY◀]  
[LCD KEY▶]  
DE  
CO  
ME  
TI  
C.REVIEW/7  
.
MENU/THUMB  
[Tally Lamp]  
Warning  
Caution  
Recording  
Special recording *  
Menu setting  
Off On  
J
Functional  
-
-
-
CANCEL  
information  
o
R
Recording status  
AE LOCK/4  
ZEBRA/5  
MARKER/6  
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
TIME CODE  
OIS / 2  
LOLUX / 3  
R
-
R
J
o
:
:
:
Lights up  
Blinks four times in 1 second  
Blinks once in 1 second  
.
* Paused state during special recording ([Clip  
Continuous]).  
(' P77 [Clip Continuous Rec] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Blinking takes priority over lighting up.  
38  
Memo :  
ꢀ
SD Card  
If the SD card contains files recorded by devices  
other than this camera recorder or files that are  
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be  
shorter or data may not be properly recorded.  
For each file format, up to 600 clips can be  
recorded to one SD card on this camera  
This camera recorder saves the recorded images  
and audio sound on the SD card (sold separately)  
in the card slot.  
ꢀ
Usable Cards  
Use a Class 6/10 SD card.  
Memo :  
recorder. When 600 clips are recorded to one  
card, the remaining space is displayed as 0 min  
regardless of the estimated recordable time,  
and no further recording can be performed.  
When the file format is set to “AVCHD”, up to  
4000 clips can be recorded to one SD card.  
ꢀ
Depending on the recording format, SD card  
with Class 4 or higher performance can also be  
used.  
ꢀ
(' P45 [Selecting System Definition, File  
Format and Video Format] )  
Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card  
A
Slide the write-protect switch upward to enable  
Caution :  
writing or deleting.  
ꢀ
Using cards other than those from Panasonic,  
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording  
failure or data loss.  
B
Slide the write-protect switch downward to  
prevent writing or deleting. (Images in the card  
are protected.)  
Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards  
Write-Protect Switch  
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.  
Differences may occur depending on the SD card  
in use and the battery condition.  
A
B
(' P111 [ ꢂ Resolution ] )  
(' P112 [ 3 Resolution ] )  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
(' P112 [ 3 Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
Write/Delete Enabled  
Write/Delete Disabled  
QuickTime/MP4/MXF  
ꢀ
AVCHD  
.
MPEG2/HD  
SP  
ꢀ
HQ  
720p/  
SP  
HQ  
720p 1080i  
1080i  
1080i  
1080i/  
1080p  
4GB  
8GB  
22  
45  
17  
35  
12  
25  
25  
50  
100  
200  
400  
19  
39  
16 GB  
32 GB  
90  
70  
50  
78  
180  
360  
140  
280  
100  
200  
156  
312  
64 GB  
(SDXC)  
128 GB  
720  
560  
400  
800  
624  
(SDXC)  
(Unit: minute)  
QuickTime  
H.264/SD  
-
ꢀ
H.264/HD  
UHQ  
H.264/Web  
LP  
480p  
285  
580  
1160  
2320  
4720  
ꢀ
1080i/1080p 480i/576i  
4GB  
8GB  
17  
35  
70  
140  
280  
47  
95  
190  
380  
760  
16 GB  
32 GB  
64 GB  
(SDXC)  
128 GB  
560  
1520  
9440  
(SDXC)  
(Unit: minute)  
39  
Inserting an SD Card  
Removing the SD Card  
This camera recorder comes with two card slots  
(Slot A and B) for video/audio recording and  
playback.  
ꢀ
Check that the SD card to be removed is not  
being accessed (status indicator of the  
card slot lights up in red).  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Open the SD card cover.  
1
Push the SD card and remove it from the  
2
slot.  
A
ꢃ
Close the SD card cover.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When both slots are inserted with usable SD  
cards, the previously selected slot is used.  
2
Caution :  
ꢀ
Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the  
camera recorder or remove the SD card when it  
is being accessed. All data recorded on the  
card, including the file that is being accessed,  
may be corrupted. Be sure to check whether the  
status indicator is lighted in green or not before  
you turn off the power or remove the SD card.  
If you mistakenly remove the card when it is  
being accessed, reinsert the card only after the  
status indicator goes off.  
B
3
.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ
Open the SD card cover.  
Insert an SD card with the notched corner  
pointing up.  
The SD card may not be recognized if you insert  
and remove the card within a short time. When  
this happens, remove the card and wait for a few  
seconds before you reinsert.  
The status indicator of the card slot to which the  
card was inserted lights up in red.  
ꢂ
Close the SD card cover.  
Card Slot Status Indicator  
The following table shows the respective states of  
slot A and B.  
Lamp  
Lights up in  
Slot Status  
The inserted SD card is being  
accessed. (writing/reading data)  
Do not turn off the power of the  
camera recorder or remove the SD  
card.  
red  
Lights up in  
green  
On standby. The inserted SD card  
can be used for recording or  
playback.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Light goes out  
SD card is not inserted.  
An unusable card is inserted.  
An SD card is inserted but a  
different slot is selected.  
40  
Switching the SD cards  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Select [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Media]ꢀ-ꢀ[Format  
Media].  
When both card slots are inserted with SD cards,  
you can use the [SLOT A/B] button to switch the  
card to use.  
(' P109 [ Format Media ] )  
Select the slot of the SD card to be  
When the memory on an SD card is full during  
recording, datarecordingautomaticallyswitchesto  
the other card.  
formatted and press the Set button (R).  
2
MENU/THUMB  
CANCEL  
MENU/THUMB  
.
AE LEVEL  
ꢂ
ꢃ
The status of the selected SD card appears.  
Select [Format] and press the Set button  
(R).  
SLOT  
CANCEL  
A/B  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
The [SLOT A/B] button is disabled during  
recording or playback. Cards will not be  
switched even if you press the button.  
4
ꢀ
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards  
.
When the following cards are inserted, [!FORMAT]  
appears at the remaining media display area.  
Format the card using the camera recorder menu.  
ꢄ
Formatting starts.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Unformatted SD cards  
SD cards formatted under different  
specifications  
* For details of the menu operation, refer to “[Basic  
Operations in Menu Screen] P 91”.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
Be sure to format the SD card on this camera  
recorder. SD cards formatted on a PC and other  
peripheral equipment cannot be used on this  
camera recorder.  
.
ꢀ
[!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media  
display area when an SD card that requires  
restoring is inserted.  
41  
ꢅ
ꢂ
Formatting is complete.  
Restoring starts.  
When formatting is complete, “Complete” appears  
and the camera recorder returns to the [Format  
Media] screen.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
During formatting, menu operation is  
unavailable but you can start recording.  
However, this is only available when a  
recordable SD card is inserted in the other slot.  
Formatting cannot be performed in the following  
cases.  
ꢀ
.
ꢃ
Restoring is complete.  
ꢀ
Recording is in progress on the SD card to be  
formatted.  
ꢀ
When restoring is complete, “Complete”  
appears and the camera recorder returns to the  
[Restore Media] screen.  
When no media that requires restoring is  
inserted, the camera recorder returns to the  
[Media] menu screen.  
ꢀ
SD card is not inserted.  
ꢀ
Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (2  
is displayed).  
ꢀ
Caution :  
ꢀ
If you format the SD card, all data recorded on  
the card, including video data and setup files,  
will be deleted.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
[Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera  
mode. However, it cannot be selected while the  
camera recorder is recording. Select [Restore  
Media] in Camera mode when the camera  
recorder is not recording.  
Restoring the SD Card  
It is necessary to restore the SD card if an  
abnormality occurs to the data in the card due to  
some reasons.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
[Restore Media] does not restore the SD card to  
its original states completely. If restoring fails,  
replace or format the SD card. Take note that  
formatting erases all the information inside the  
SD card.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
[!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media  
display area when an SD card that requires  
restoring is inserted.  
Restoring cannot be performed in the following  
cases.  
ꢀ
Select [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Media]ꢀ-ꢀ[Restore  
Media].  
(' P109 [ Restore Media ] )  
ꢀ
Camera recorder is recording in progress.  
ꢀ
SD card is not inserted.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (2  
is displayed).  
ꢁ
Select the SD card to be restored and press  
Restoring is not required.  
the Set button (R).  
ꢀ
2
.
42  
Example: In the case of QuickTime/MP4  
Clips Recorded to SD Cards  
Folders in the SD Card  
ABCG0001  
Clip Number  
Images captured are recorded to the [PRIVATE]  
folder inside the SD card.  
A number in automatic  
ascending order is assigned in  
the recording order.  
The Clip Number can be reset in  
the menu.*  
Depending on the setting for [System] and  
[ꢂFormat]/[3Format], the clips may be recorded  
in a folder created under the [PRIVATE] folder.  
System ꢂFormat/3Format Record Folder  
Clip Name Prefix (any four alphanumeric characters)  
This is set to “xxxG” (“xxx” denotes the last 3  
digits of the serial number) by default.  
.
HD  
HD  
HD  
HD  
HD  
SD  
QuickTime(MPEG2)  
MP4(MPEG2)  
JVC/CQAV  
JVC/BPAV  
AVCHD  
JVC/CMAV  
JVC/CQAVC  
JVC/CQAVC  
AVCHD  
* [Clip Set] - [Reset Clip Number]  
(' P114 [ Reset Clip Number ] )  
Memo :  
MXF(MPEG2)  
QuickTime(H.264)  
QuickTime(H.264)  
ꢀ
Before recording starts, you can set any  
characters for the clip name prefix by using  
[Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Clip  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Clip Name Prefix].  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “HD+Web”, web files  
(MOV format) will be recorded in the [DCIM]  
folder.  
(' P114 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )  
ꢀ
By formatting (initializing) the SD card from the  
[Format Media] menu on the camera recorder,  
folders required for recording in the current  
[System] settings will be generated.  
When the [System] settings and  
ꢀ
Changes cannot be made after recording.  
Recorded Clips  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The recorded materials may be split into several  
files but they can be played back continuously  
on the camera recorder.  
ꢀ
[QuickTime(MPEG2)] settings are changed,  
folders required for recording in those settings  
will be automatically generated.  
Clips may be recorded across the two SD cards  
in card slots A and B depending on the recording  
time of the clip.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
When a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted  
using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac),  
recording to the SD card may fail if formatting  
(initializing) of the card is not performed.  
When copying videos in MP4 file format to a  
HDD using a PC, it is recommended to use [JVC  
ProHD Clip Manager Software], which is found  
in the bundled CD-ROM, to maintain continuity.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name  
A clip recorded across several cards cannot be  
played back continuously. Continuous playback  
is only possible when the recording is made on  
one card.  
ꢀ
When recording is stopped, the images, audio  
and accompanying data which are recorded  
from start to stop are recorded as one “clip” on  
the SD card.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
An 8-character clip name is automatically  
generated for the recorded clip.  
(“Clip Name Prefix” + “Clip Number”)  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat] is set to  
“AVCHD”, the clip name generated consists of  
only the Clip Number (5-digit number).  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Format ] )  
43  
ꢁ
Basic Shooting  
Procedures  
Press the [REC] button to start recording to  
the SD card.  
This camera recorder has three [REC] buttons.  
Any of the [REC] buttons can be used to start/  
stop recording by default.  
Preparations  
The tally lamp lights up in red during recording.  
ꢀ
Zoom Operation  
(' P47 [Zoom Operation] )  
2
4
ꢀ
Adjusting the Focus Manually  
(' P48 [Focus Operation] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
4
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards  
in the factory default, pressing the [REC] button  
starts recording only to the media in the selected  
slot.  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Slot Mode] is set to “Dual”, recording can be  
performed simultaneously to the cards in both  
the slots.  
1
POWER  
ON  
3
OFF  
(CHG)  
MODE  
(' P73 [Dual Rec] )  
.
ꢀ
The tally lamp can be turned off in [System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Tally Lamp].  
ꢀ
Supply battery or AC adapter power to the  
camera recorder.  
(' P110 [ Tally Lamp ] )  
(' P28 [Power Supply] )  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Insert an SD card.  
ꢂ
Check the most recently captured images.  
(' P39 [SD Card] )  
ꢀ
Press the [C.REVIEW/7] button on the lens  
to activate the Clip Review function. The  
most recently captured images are played  
back on the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
screen.  
Turn on the power of the camera recorder.  
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the center of  
the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to set to  
“ON”. The camera recorder starts up in Camera  
mode and is ready for recording.  
ꢀ
After playback, the camera recorder returns  
to standby mode (STBY).  
ꢃ
ꢀ
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and  
(' P71 [Viewing Recorded Videos  
Immediately (Clip Review)] )  
viewfinder.  
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and  
Viewfinder] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
[Clip Review] is assigned to [C.REVIEW/7]  
button in factory default.  
Shooting  
ꢀ
[Clip Review] can also be assigned to other user  
buttons.  
Configure the video and audio input  
settings.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
You have to configure video settings such as  
brightness adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and  
white balance adjustment in order to start  
shooting. You also have to adjust the audio  
input settings and audio recording level for  
audio recording.  
ꢀ
Adjusting the Brightness  
(' P51 [Adjusting the Brightness] )  
ꢀ
Adjusting the White Balance  
(' P56 [Adjusting the White Balance] )  
ꢀ
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and  
Recording Level  
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )  
44  
Selecting a File Format  
Selecting System  
Definition, File Format and  
Video Format  
You can select the resolution of the recorded  
videos (HD, SD, or Web), file format for recording/  
playback, and the video recording format on this  
camera recorder.  
Select a file format in [ꢂFormat]/[3Format].  
There are five file formats for selection.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
QuickTime(MPEG2):  
QuickTime file format (.MOV)  
MP4(MPEG2):  
MP4 file format  
MXF(MPEG2):  
MXF (material exchange format)  
AVCHD:  
AVCHD file format  
QuickTime(H.264):  
QuickTime format (.MOV)  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Make a selection in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Format].  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The available options vary as follows depending  
Selecting a System Definition  
on the [System] setting.  
ꢀ
When “HD”, “HD+SD”, or “HD+Web” is set,  
There are three different definitions for selection.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HD:  
the options for slot A are:  
Records in HD (High Definition) quality.  
QuickTime(MPEG2), MP4(MPEG2),  
MXF(MPEG2), AVCHD, QuickTime(H.264)  
SD:  
ꢀ
Records in SD (Standard Definition) quality.  
Web:  
When “SD” or “HD+SD” is set, the available  
option for slot B is:  
QuickTime(H.264)  
Records in low definition quality  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When “HD+Web” is set, the available option  
You can select a definition for the recorded images  
for slot B is:  
from the following items under [System].  
QuickTime(H.264)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HD:  
Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.  
SD:  
Selecting a Video Format  
Records in SD quality for both slots A and B.  
HD+SD:  
ꢀ
Select a [Record Format] from the list of formats.  
The selectable [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]/[3Frame &  
Bit Rate] changes according to the settings of  
[System], [ꢂFormat], and [ꢂResolution].  
The recording bit rate (video) is 35 Mbps VBR in  
“HQ” mode, and 18.3 Mbps (1080i is 25 Mbps)  
CBR in “SP” mode.  
If [ꢂFormat]/[3Format] is set to “AVCHD”, the  
recording bit rate (system rate) is 24 Mbps VBR  
in “HQ” mode, and 17 Mbps VBR in “SP” mode.  
Records in HD quality for slot A, and SD quality  
for slot B.  
(' P72 [Recording Simultaneously at Two  
Different Definitions] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HD+Web:  
Records in HD quality for slot A, and Web quality  
for slot B.  
(' P72 [Recording Simultaneously at Two  
Different Definitions] )  
45  
ꢀ
List of Formats  
When [System] is set to “SD” or “HD+SD”, the  
available options for slot B are as follows.  
The following is a list of file formats and video  
formats that can be selected on this camera  
recorder.  
The video format is fixed as follows according to  
the model.  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “HD”, “HD+SD”, or “HD  
+Web”, the options for slot A are:  
Record Format  
Remarks  
Format  
Resolution Frame &  
Bit Rate  
Record Format  
Resolution Frame &  
QuickTime 720 x 480 60i (U  
Recordable  
Remarks  
Format  
ꢀ(H.264)  
model)  
using Class 4  
Bit Rate  
720 x 576 50i (E  
QuickTime 1920x1080 60i(HQ)  
model)  
MP4  
30p(HQ)  
50i(HQ)  
25p(HQ)  
ꢀ
MXF  
ꢀ
(MPEG2)  
Options for slot B when [System] is set to “HD  
+Web”:  
24p(HQ)  
Record Format  
1440x1080 60i(HQ)  
50i(HQ)  
Remarks  
Format  
Resolution Frame &  
Bit Rate  
60i(SP)  
HDV  
QuickTime 480x270  
30p(LP)  
25p(LP)  
24p(LP)  
Recordable  
compatible  
ꢀ(H.264)  
usingClass4  
50i(SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
Memo :  
ꢀ
1280x720 60p(HQ)  
30p(HQ)  
[Frame & Bit Rate] is fixed at the [Frame & Bit  
Rate] setting for slot A.  
50p(HQ)  
25p(HQ)  
ꢀ
24p(HQ)  
60p(SP) HDV  
compatible  
50p(SP) HDV  
compatible  
1920x1080 60i(HQ) Recordable  
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos  
For selecting the aspect ratio for the SD image  
when [System] is set to “SD” or “HD+SD”.  
You can select “16:9” or “4:3”.  
AVCHD  
Memo :  
using Class 4  
50i(HQ)  
60i(SP)  
50i(SP)  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”,  
aspect ratio is fixed at “16:9”.  
QuickTime 1920x1080 60i(UHQ)  
Setting the Record Format Menu  
(H.264)  
50i(UHQ)  
24p(UHQ)  
ꢀ
Display the [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Format] menu.  
Set each of the items.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢂ
The “1280x720” setting is not available for MXF  
files.  
After setting is complete for all items, press  
When “HD+SD” is selected, [Frame & Bit Rate]  
cannot be selected.  
the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The record format is switched.  
A “Please Wait...” message appears on the  
screen during switching.  
ꢀ
U model:  
50i(HQ), 50i(SP), 50i(UHQ), 50p(SP),  
25p(HQ)  
ꢀ
E model:  
60i(HQ), 60i(SP), 60i(UHQ), 30p(HQ),  
24p(HQ), 24p(UHQ)  
ꢀ
46  
Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip  
Zoom Operation  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to  
“SERVO”.  
Press the zoom lever to zoom.  
Adjusts the angle of view.  
Zoom ratio: 1x to 23x (optical zoom only)  
Zooming can be operated using any of the three  
levers/rings below.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The zoom speed changes according to the  
extent the zoom lever is being pushed.  
Zooms into wide angle and increases the  
angle of view when “W” is pressed.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Zoom Lever at the Grip  
Zoom Lever at the Handle  
Zoom Ring at the Lens Section:  
Functions as a zoom ring when the [ZOOM  
SERVO/MANUAL] switch is set to “MANUAL”.  
Zooms into telephoto and decreases the  
angle of view when “T” is pressed.  
A zoom bar appears during zoom operation  
REC  
T
R
E
C
W
00:00:.00  
00:000.00  
HOLD  
Jan 24,2012  
12:34:56  
Jan 24,2012  
12:34:56  
12.5/30fps  
12.5/30fps  
5.6f t  
ND 1/64  
AE+6  
0dB  
5.6f t  
ND 1/64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
F1.6  
4030 20 10  
0
4030 20 10  
0
P
13000K  
1/100  
P
13000K  
1/100  
FIX VAR OFF  
.
Using the Zoom Lever at the Handle  
ZOOM  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to  
“SERVO”.  
Set the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch  
to “FIX” or “VAR”.  
SERVO MANUAL  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
Setting to “FIX” will allow the zoom operation to  
move at the speed set in [Handle Zoom Speed].  
ꢀ
Set the zoom speed using [Main Menu]ꢀ-  
[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[Handle Zoom Speed].  
(' P96 [ Handle Zoom Speed ] )  
Setting to “VAR” will change the zoom speed  
according to the pressure applied on the lever.  
ꢀ
ꢂ
Press the zoom lever at the handle to zoom.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch is  
set to “OFF”, the zoom lever at the handle  
section cannot be used.  
47  
Using Zoom Ring at the Lens Section  
Focus Operation  
Adjusting Focus Manually  
ꢀ
Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to  
“MANUAL”.  
You can adjust the preferred angle of view by  
turning the zoom ring.  
Saving/Recalling Current Zoom  
Position (Preset Zoom)  
FOCUS  
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
TIME CODE  
This allows you to register up to three zoom  
AUTO  
MANU  
positions.  
ꢀ
Assign the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset  
Zoom2”, or “Preset Zoom3” function to any  
of the user buttons.  
PUSH AUTO  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
(' P97 [USER1 - USER7, LCD KEY▲/LCD  
KEY▶/LCD KEY▼/LCD KEY◀] )  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Save the current zoom position.  
ꢀ
Press any of the buttons assigned with the  
“Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or “Preset  
Zoom3” function for more than 1 second.  
The current zoom position will be stored.  
.
ꢀ
Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to  
“MANU”.  
ꢀ
The manual focus icon " appears on the  
Recall the stored zoom position.  
screen.  
ꢀ
Press any of the buttons assigned with the  
“Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or “Preset  
Zoom3” function and release within 1  
second.  
00:00:00.00  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
ꢀ
The camera recorder zooms to the stored  
zoom position.  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
Memo :  
ꢀ
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
To recall the stored zoom position, set the  
[ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to “SERVO”.  
The zoom speed to the zoom position can be set  
with [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Preset Zoom Speed].  
(' P98 [ Preset Zoom Speed ] )  
Operating other zoom maneuvers during a  
zoom position recall will cancel the recall.  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
If [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display  
Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Focus] is set to “Off”, the " icon will  
not appear.  
(' P105 [ Focus ] )  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Using the Focus Assist function makes it easier  
to focus.  
(' P49 [Focus Assist Function] )  
Pressing the [FOCUS AUTO] button in the  
Manual Focus mode activates the One-push  
Auto Focus mode, while holding down the  
[FOCUS AUTO] button activates the Push Auto  
Focus mode.  
ꢀ
(' P49 [One Push Auto Focus] )  
(' P49 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily  
(Push Auto Focus)] )  
48  
Adjusting Focus Automatically  
Focus Assist Function  
ꢀ
Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to  
“AUTO”.  
When the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button is pressed  
during shooting, the focused area is displayed  
in color. This enables easy and accurate  
focusing.  
The auto focus icon # appears on the screen.  
ꢀ
Select the color (blue, red or green) in the menu.  
One Push Auto Focus  
Memo :  
ꢀ
While in the Manual Focus mode, pressing the  
[PUSH AUTO] button (within 1 minute) makes the  
camera recorder focus on the center of the frame  
automatically.  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Shooting  
Assist]ꢀ-ꢀ[Focus Assist]ꢀ-ꢀ[Type] is set to  
“ACCU-Focus”, the depth of field becomes  
shallower to enable easier focusing.  
(' P103 [ Focus Assist ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Face detection does not work during One Push  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The “ACCU-Focus” function switches  
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.  
Select the display color in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/  
VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Shooting Assist]ꢀ-ꢀ[Focus Assist]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Color].  
Auto Focus.  
ꢀ
When the operation is complete, the camera  
recorder returns to the Manual Focus mode  
automatically.  
ꢀ
One Push Auto Focus functions with emphasis  
on the focusing speed. This function is not  
suitable during recording.  
(' P104 [ Color ] )  
Setting Focus Assist Function to a User Button  
Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily  
(Push Auto Focus)  
Youcanassignthe“FocusAssist”functiontoauser  
button.  
ꢀ
The camera recorder will shift to Auto Focus  
mode temporarily and automatically adjusts  
focus when the [PUSH AUTO] button is pressed  
during shooting in Manual Focus mode.  
Release the [PUSH AUTO] button to return to  
Manual Focus mode.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
ꢀ
Memo :  
ꢀ
Face detection does not work during Push Auto  
Focus.  
Adjusting Focus on Far Objects  
Slide the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to “∞”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The ∞ icon is displayed.  
Release your finger to return to Manual Focus  
mode.  
49  
Adjusting the Focusing by  
Face Detection  
Detection Frame (Orange)  
This function detects human faces and  
automatically adjusts focus during Auto Focus.  
It can also track moving objects.  
When several faces are detected, you can select  
one to focus on.  
Memo :  
AEꢀꢂ  
.
ꢀ
This function can also adjust the brightness  
automatically according to the brightness of the  
face detected.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
If the detection frame does not appear, make  
sure that the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞]  
selection switch is set to “AUTO”. And if [Face  
Detect] has been set to “AF&AE”, set brightness  
adjustment to the automatic adjustment mode.  
(' P51 [Adjusting the Brightness  
(' P97 [ Face Detect ] )  
MENU/THUMB  
Automatically] )  
CANCEL  
Selecting Specific Person from Several  
Persons  
MENU/THUMB  
ꢀ
Hold down the user button that is assigned  
with “Face Detect”.  
AE LEVEL  
ꢀ
The camera recorder will enter face  
selection mode and the face detection icon  
(ꢃ) will blink.  
CANCEL  
ꢀ
An orange frame will appear on the face of  
the person nearest to the center of the  
screen. Blue frames will appear on the faces  
of others.  
.
ꢀ
Assign the “Face Detect” function to any of  
the user buttons.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
Detection Frame (Orange)  
ꢁ
Focus the camera recorder on a person and  
press the user button that is assigned with  
“Face Detect”.  
ꢀ
When Face detection is enabled, the face  
detection icon (ꢃ) appears.  
ꢀ
Blinking  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera  
Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[User Switch Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Face  
Detect] is set to “AF”, “ꢃꢀ#” appears.  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera  
Detection Frame (Blue)  
Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[User Switch Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Face  
Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, “ꢃꢀAE±0”  
appears.  
.
ꢁ
Select a specific person.  
ꢀ
Use the cross-shaped button (HIJK) to  
select a person.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
If you select the person nearest to the center  
of the screen, an orange frame will appear  
on his face.  
ꢀ
An orange frame will appear on the face of  
the selected person and focus will be  
automatically adjusted.  
Focus will be automatically adjusted for the  
selected person.  
50  
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can use the cross-shaped button (HI) on  
the side of the camera recorder to set the target  
level (brighter/darker) to maintain optimum  
brightness during automatic adjustment.  
(' P95 [ AE Level ] )  
Detection Frame (Orange)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The convergence speed of the automatic  
adjustment for gain, shutter and iris can be set  
in the menu.  
(' P95 [ AE Speed ] )  
If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and  
Shutter) have been set to “Auto”, the value of the  
corresponding items when the user button that  
is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed can be fixed.  
(' P98 [ AE Lock ] )  
Detection Frame (Blue)  
.
ꢂ
Press the Set button (R) to confirm the  
person for face detection.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the  
selection.  
Adjusting the Brightness Manually  
ꢀ
You can specify the detection sensitivity and the  
operation speed after losing sight of the face  
using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[User Switch Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Face Detect]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Sensitivity] and [Hysteresis].  
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “OFF”,  
some or all of the items (Iris, Gain and Shutter  
Speed) can be manually adjusted.  
(' P52 [Adjusting the Iris] )  
(' P53 [Setting the Gain] )  
(' P54 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )  
(' P97 [ Sensitivity ] )  
(' P98 [ Hysteresis ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
If Iris, Gain and Shutter Speed are manually  
adjusted, the [AE Level] setting is temporarily  
disabled.  
Adjusting the Brightness  
Adjust the brightness using Iris, Gain, Shutter  
speed and ND filter according to the brightness of  
the object.  
Adjusting the Brightness Automatically  
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”, Iris,  
Gain, Shutter speed and ND filter are automatically  
adjusted according to the brightness of the object  
to maintain optimum brightness.  
AE LOCK/4  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
TO  
A
U
SH  
PU  
FULL AUTO  
ON  
CANCEL  
GAIN  
OFF  
WHT BAL SHUTTER  
.
51  
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode  
Adjusting the Iris  
You can adjust the aperture of the lens iris manually  
or automatically according to the brightness of the  
object.  
Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto Iris mode.  
The iris is automatically adjusted according to the  
brightness of the object.  
The ꢀ icon appears on the screen.  
00:00:00.00  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
IRIS  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
PUSH AUTO  
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera  
recorder to “ON” to enter Auto Iris mode  
(automatic adjustment mode). The iris is  
automatically adjusted according to the  
brightness of the object.  
In this case, the [IRIS] switch on the camera  
recorder is disabled.  
.
ꢀ
The iris open/close limit can be set in [Main  
Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[Auto Iris Limit  
(OPEN)]ꢀ/ꢀ[Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)] during Auto  
Iris.  
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode  
The aperture value (F-number) of the lens can be  
set manually.  
(' P96 [ Auto Iris Limit (OPEN) ] )  
(' P96 [ Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE) ] )  
You can use the cross-shaped button (HI) on  
the side control panel to set the target level  
(brighter/darker) of the auto iris.  
(' P95 [ AE Level ] )  
ꢀ
Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Manual  
Iris mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The ꢀ icon on the screen disappears.  
ꢁ
Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the  
iris manually.  
The convergence speed of the auto iris can be  
set in the menu.  
The open F-number of the aperture varies  
according to the zoom position.  
(' P95 [ AE Speed ] )  
Wide [W] end  
Tele [T] end  
:
:
F1.6  
F3.0  
One Push Auto Iris  
F-number  
Description  
Decrease  
The subject appears brighter.  
The focused range becomes  
sharper, while the background is  
blurred to produce a soft image.  
The subject appears darker.  
Background of image becomes  
focused as well.  
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,  
press the [PUSH AUTO] button to adjust the iris  
according to the brightness of the object.  
Push Auto Iris  
Increase  
Memo :  
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,  
hold down the [PUSH AUTO] button to change to  
Auto Iris mode temporarily. The iris will be  
automatically adjusted according to the brightness  
of the object.  
ꢀ
Pressing the [PUSH AUTO] button during  
Manual Iris mode activates One Push Auto Iris  
mode. And holding down the [PUSH AUTO]  
button activates Push Auto Iris mode.  
52  
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain  
Adjustment)  
Setting the Gain  
ꢀ
This function electrically boosts the light sensitivity  
when there is insufficient illumination on the object.  
You can set the gain of the video amplifier  
according to the brightness of the object. Select the  
setting mode according to your shooting  
conditions.  
Press the [GAIN] button to set to the  
Automatic Gain mode (ALC).  
The ꢀ icon appears on the screen.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera  
recorder to “ON” to enter the Automatic Gain  
mode ([ALC] fixed). The gain of the video  
amplifier is automatically set according to the  
brightness of the object.  
GAIN  
FULL AUTO  
ON  
In this case, the [GAIN] switch on the camera  
recorder is disabled.  
L
M
H
OFF  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The upper limit of the gain setting value during  
ALC operation can be set in [Main Menu]ꢀ-  
[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[ALC Limit].  
(' P96 [ ALC Limit ] )  
.
Manual Gain Mode (Manual Gain  
Switching)  
ꢀ
Press the [GAIN] button to set to the Manual  
Gain mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The ꢀ icon on the screen disappears.  
Use the [L/M/H] switch to set the gain of the  
selected video amplifier.  
ꢀ
The default positions of the switch are as  
follows.  
[L]  
[M] : 0dB  
[H] 9dB  
:
-6dB  
:
Memo :  
ꢀ
The gain value of each position can be set within  
the range of “-6dB” to “24dB” (in increments of  
3ꢀdB) in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity  
causes the screen to appear grainier.  
(' P96 [GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H] )  
53  
Switching Shutter Speed  
Setting the Electronic  
Shutter  
You can change the shutter speed (time for each  
shooting frame) using the electronic shutter  
function. Electronic shutter can be adjusted  
manually or automatically.  
When shutter is ON, use the cross-shaped button  
(JK)tosettheshutterspeed. Shutterspeeddiffers  
according to the video format and variable frame  
rate settings.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
To display Shutter in angle (DEG), set [ꢂFrame  
& Bit Rate] to “24p(HQ)” or “25p(HQ)”, and set  
[Shutter] in [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings] to  
“DEG”.  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
(' P106 [ Shutter ] )  
Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter  
Switching)  
ꢀ
Press the [SHUTTER] button to set to the  
Manual Shutter mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The ꢀ icon on the screen disappears.  
Use the Set button (R) to switch between the  
shutter modes and the cross-shaped button  
(JK) to switch between the speeds.  
During Modes Other Than Variable Frame Rec  
720/60p  
720/30p  
1080/60i 1080/50i  
1080/30p 1080/25p  
720/50p  
720/25p  
Resolution/  
Frame & Bit  
Rate  
720/24p  
1080/24p  
Shutter  
J
ON  
(Step)  
1/10000  
1/4000  
^
^
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/10000 1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/50  
1/250  
O
A
UT  
SH  
PU  
FULL AUTO  
ON  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
OFF  
1/54  
1/50  
CANCEL  
GAIN  
WHT BAL SHUTTER  
1/48  
(Standard)  
1/30  
1/25  
1/24  
.
1/15  
1/12.5  
1/6.25  
1/12  
K
J
1/7.5  
1/6  
Switching Shutter Mode  
ON  
(Variable)  
(Upper limit)  
Default values  
1/10843  
1/10227  
Press the Set button (center of the cross-shaped  
~
button) to turn ON/OFF the shutter.  
1/60.13 1/50.09  
~
1/48.09  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When the shutter is ON, “Step” or “Variable” may  
be selected in [Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[Shutter].  
“Step” is the factory default.  
K
(Lower limit) 1/30.07 1/25.05  
1/60 1/50  
1/24.05  
1/48  
OFF  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
(' P95 [ Shutter ] )  
The operations of the cross-shaped button  
(JK) and Set button (R) are disabled in the  
following cases.  
ꢀ
During clip preview  
ꢀ
During display of the USB switching  
confirmation screen  
ꢀ
During display of the formatting confirmation  
screen  
ꢀ
When selecting a face using face detection  
ꢀ
When selecting a photometry area with [Spot  
Meter] set to “Manual”  
54  
During Variable Frame Rec  
Resolution/  
Frame & Bit Rate  
720/30p, 720/24p, 1080/30p, 1080/24p  
Shutter  
Frame Rate  
60, 30, 15 54, 27  
50, 25 48, 24, 12, 6 45, 22.5 40, 20, 10  
36, 18  
^
32, 2  
^
^
^
^
^
^
ON  
(Step)  
1/10000  
1/4000  
J
^
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
^
^
^
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
^
^
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
^
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/60  
1/54  
1/54  
1/50  
1/54  
1/50  
1/48  
1/54  
1/50  
1/48  
1/45  
1/54  
1/50  
1/48  
1/45  
1/40  
1/54  
1/50  
1/48  
1/45  
1/40  
1/36  
1/54  
1/50  
1/48  
1/45  
1/40  
1/36  
1/32  
(Standard)  
1/30  
1/27  
1/25  
1/24  
1/22.5  
1/11.25  
1/5.625  
1/20  
1/18  
1/16  
1/15  
1/13.5  
1/6.75  
1/12.5  
1/6.25  
1/12  
1/10  
1/9  
1/8  
K
J
1/7.5  
1/6  
1/5  
1/4.5  
1/4  
ON  
(Variable)  
1/10227  
1/10843  
~
1/10227  
1/10843  
1/10227  
1/10843  
(Upper limit)  
(Lower limit)  
K
1/60.13  
1/60  
1/54.10 1/50.09  
1/48.09  
1/48  
1/45.07  
1/45  
1/40.07  
1/40  
1/36.05  
1/36  
1/32.04  
1/32  
OFF  
1/54  
1/50  
.
ꢀ
1080/25p  
720/25p  
Resolution/  
Frame & Bit Rate  
Shutter  
50, 25, 12.5  
^
48, 24, 6  
^
45, 22.5  
^
^
40, 20, 10  
36, 18  
32, 2  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/50  
Frame Rate  
J
^
^
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/50  
ON  
(Step)  
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/50  
^
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/50  
^
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/50  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/100  
1/50  
1/48  
1/48  
1/45  
1/48  
1/45  
1/40  
1/48  
1/45  
1/40  
1/36  
(Standard)  
1/48  
1/45  
1/40  
1/36  
1/32  
1/25  
1/24  
1/22.5  
1/11.25  
1/5.625  
1/20  
1/18  
1/16  
K
J
K
1/12.5  
1/6.25  
1/12  
1/10  
1/9  
1/8  
1/6  
1/5  
1/4.5  
1/4  
(Upper limit)  
(Lower limit)  
1/10227  
1/10843  
1/10227  
1/10843  
1/10227  
1/10843  
ON  
(Variable)  
~
1/50.09  
1/50  
1/48.09  
1/48  
1/45.07  
1/45  
1/40.07  
1/40  
1/36.05  
1/36  
1/32.04  
1/32  
OFF  
.
55  
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic  
Shutter Adjustment)  
Memo :  
ꢀ
It is recommended to use the ND filter to set the  
lens aperture to less than F8.  
ꢀ
Press the [SHUTTER] button or set the  
[FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter  
Automatic Shutter mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The ꢀ icon appears on the screen.  
The camera recorder enters the Automatic  
Shutter mode. The shutter speed is  
automatically adjusted according to the  
brightness of the object.  
Adjusting the White  
Balance  
Adjust the white balance according to the color  
temperature of the lighting. You can select the  
adjustment mode according to the shooting  
conditions.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Switching of shutter speed with the cross-  
shaped button (JK) and switching of shutter  
mode with the Set button (R) are disabled.  
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies  
according to the light source, it is necessary to  
readjust the white balance when the main light  
source illuminating the object changes.  
Setting the ND Filter  
WHT BAL SHUTTER  
FULL AUTO  
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the  
ON  
appropriate range.  
B
A
PRESET  
Switch according to the brightness of the object.  
When the position on the switch is changed, the  
selected position of the ND filter is displayed on the  
LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.  
(Display 2 screen)  
OFF  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display  
Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[ND Filter] is set to “Off”, the position  
of the ND filter will not be displayed.  
(' P105 [ ND Filter ] )  
.
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual  
Switching)  
ꢀ
Press the [WHT BAL] button to set to  
Manual White Balance mode.  
ND FILTER  
1/64  
1/16  
1/4  
ꢀ
You can select the white balance with the  
[WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection switch.  
Use the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection  
switch to select “PRESET” (preset mode),  
“A” (memory A mode), or “B” (memory B  
mode).  
ꢀ
OFF  
ꢀ
The value assigned to the switch appears on  
the screen.  
.
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
This is fixed at “FAW” when the [FULL AUTO]  
switch of the camera recorder is set to “ON”.  
00:00:00.00  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
ND 1 /64  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
56  
Preset Mode (PRESET)  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Use the cross-shaped button (I) to switch  
between the Color Temperature Selection  
screen and the Color Temperature Detailed  
Selection screen.  
ꢀ
Two different color temperature settings are  
registered on this camera recorder. You can  
switch between them using the [,] button.  
(Default setting: “3200K”ꢀ)ꢀ“5600K”)  
Press the [,] button to switch to a different  
color temperature.  
ꢀ
Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode  
(B)  
(“Preset Temp.”ꢀ)ꢀ“Alternative Temp.”)  
ꢀ
Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] switch to  
“PRESET”.  
Press the [,] button.  
ꢀ
Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or  
Memory B.  
ꢀ
When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection  
switch is set to “A” or “B”, press the [,] button  
to execute white balance. The white balance will  
be automatically adjusted and the adjusted  
value will be saved in Memory A or Memory B.  
ꢁ
Setting the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative  
Temp.] Values  
You can change both the color temperature  
settings in the Preset mode in the menu.  
ꢀ
Prepare the camera recorder.  
A
B
C
ꢁ
Set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “ON”.  
Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto mode.  
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.  
ꢀ
Open the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative  
Temp.] menu.  
ꢀ
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ  
ꢀ[White Balance]ꢀ  
[Alternative Temp.], and press the Set button  
-
ꢀ[Camera Process]ꢀ  
-
-ꢀ[Preset Temp.] and  
Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the  
lighting.  
(
R).  
(' P56 [Setting the ND Filter] )  
ꢀ
The Color Temperature setting screen  
appears.  
ꢂ
ꢃ
Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection  
switch to “A” or “B”.  
Locate a place with similar lighting  
conditions as the object to be shot, place a  
white object near the center of the screen  
and zoom in to fill the screen with white.  
ꢄ
Press the [,] (Auto White Balance)  
button.  
ꢀ
The white detection frame appears when  
Auto White Balance is activated. Fill the  
frame with white completely.  
Color Temperature  
Detailed Selection  
Screen  
ꢀ
“AUTO WHITE A OPERATION” or “AUTO  
WHITE B OPERATION” appears on the  
viewfinder when Auto White Balance is  
activated.  
Color Temperature Selection Screen  
.
ꢁ
Select the color temperature.  
ꢀ
When selecting from a setting value (Color  
Temperature Selection screen), use the  
cross-shaped button (JK) to select the color  
temperature.  
ꢀ
When the correct white balance is achieved,  
“AUTO WHITE A OK” or “AUTO WHITE B  
OK” appears for about 3 seconds together  
with the approximate color temperature.  
[Setting Values: 7500K, 6500K, 5600K,  
5200K, 4800K, 4200K, R3200K, 3000K,  
2800K]  
ꢀ
To select detailed values (Color  
Temperature Detailed Selection screen)  
ꢀ
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to  
display the Color Temperature Detailed  
Selection screen.  
ꢀ
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to  
select a color temperature.  
[Setting Values: 2300K to 15000K (in  
100K increments)]  
57  
White Paint Adjustment  
You can fine-tune the white balance saved in  
Memory A or Memory B.  
ꢀ
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Process]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[White Balance]ꢀ-ꢀ[AWB Paint] and press  
the Set button (R).  
AUTO WHITE  
OPERATION  
A
White Detection  
Frame  
The White Paint Adjustment screen appears.  
[AWB] Activating  
1
AUTO WHITE  
OK  
A
.
Result Display  
.
ꢁ
Adjust the R and B values.  
Caution :  
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R  
value and (HI) to adjust B value.  
ꢀ
Do not use highly reflective objects, such as  
metals. Doing so may result in improper white  
balance adjustment.  
ꢀ
The Auto White function cannot provide  
optimum white balance with an object outside  
the adjustment range, for example when it  
contains only a single color or not enough white  
color.  
Error Message  
.
ꢂ
If the white balance adjustment is not correctly  
completed, one of the following messages will  
appear for about 3 seconds.  
Press the Set button (R).  
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.  
Message  
NG : OBJECT  
Status  
The object used is defective.  
Displayed when there is not  
enough white color on the  
object, or when the color  
temperature is not suitable.  
Use another white object and  
adjust the white balance  
again.  
R Value  
B Value  
.
ERROR : LOW  
LIGHT  
Insufficient illumination.  
Displayed when the lighting is  
dark. Increase the lighting  
and adjust the white balance  
again.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Selecting [,] will usually clear the White Paint  
Adjustment value. But when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Camera Process]ꢀ-ꢀ[White Balance]ꢀ-ꢀ[Clear  
Paint After AWB] is set to “Off”, values will not  
be cleared even when [,] is selected.  
(' P102 [ Clear Paint After AWB ] )  
ERROR : OVER  
LIGHT  
Excessive illumination.  
Displayed when the lighting is  
too bright. Decrease the  
lighting and adjust the white  
balance again.  
58  
Automatic White Balance Mode (FAW:  
Fulltime Auto White balance)  
Memo :  
ꢀ
For details of the respective items, see the  
[Camera Process] menu.  
(' P98 [Camera Process Menu] )  
ꢀ
Press the [WHT BAL] button on the side control  
panel to enter into Automatic White Balance  
mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
“<FAW>” appears on the screen.  
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera  
recorder to “ON” to enter Automatic White  
Balance mode. An appropriate white balance is  
automatically adjusted according to the color  
temperature of the lighting on the object.  
White balance switching with the [WHT BAL  
B/A/PRESET] selection switch is disabled.  
Using the Image Stabilizer  
Reduces blurring of images due to camera shake.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Check whether the image stabilizer feature  
is turned ON or OFF.  
If the image stabilizer icon (ꢄ/ꢅ) does not  
appear on the screen display, the image  
stabilizer function is OFF.  
00:00:00.00  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
00:00:00.00  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE
Jan 24,2012  
ꢀFAW  
F1
1/1
4030 20 10  
0
ꢀFAW  
.
Caution :  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
1/100  
ꢀ
The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of Auto  
White Balance.  
.
ꢁ
Press the [OIS/2] button to turn ON the  
image stabilizer feature (when image  
stabilizer feature is OFF).  
ꢀ
When the power of the camera recorder is  
turned on with the [FAW] mode selected, it takes  
about 15 seconds for the colors to stabilize.  
The image stabilizer feature switches between  
ON and OFF with every press of the [OIS/2]  
button.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ  
[User Switch Set]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ
OFF:  
-
ꢀ[AE Lock] is set to “AE/WB”,  
Use this setting when the camera recorder is  
the white balance when the user button that is  
assigned [AE Lock] is pressed can be fixed.  
(' P98 [ AE Lock ] )  
secured, such as when using a tripod.  
ꢀ
ON:  
Reduces blurring of images due to camera  
shake.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ-  
[OIS]ꢀ-ꢀ[Level] to set the correction level.  
(' P95 [ Level ] )  
Adjusting the Camera  
Image  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Correction by this feature may not be sufficient  
when camera shake is too strong.  
“OIS” is assigned to [OIS/2] button in factory  
default.  
The picture quality of the camera can be set using  
the [Camera Process] menu.  
As the adjustments are shown on the screen, you  
can adjust the values while checking the picture  
quality on the camera.  
“OIS” can also be assigned to other user  
buttons.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
[Detail]  
[Master Black]  
[Black Toe]  
[Knee]  
[White Clip]  
[Gamma]  
[WDR]  
[White Balance]  
[Color Matrix]  
[Color Gain]  
[Reverse Picture]  
59  
Setting Input Channel to [INPUT1]/[INPUT2]  
Audio Recording  
Select the audio to input to [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]  
terminals with the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode  
switch.  
You can record audio from the two channels (CH1/  
CH2) in synchronization with video images on this  
camera recorder.  
Setting  
[LINE]  
Description  
Select from the four options below to record the  
audio.  
Use this setting when connecting to  
an audio device or other equipment.  
The reference input level is +4 dBu.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Built-in Microphone  
Microphone connected to [AUX] terminal  
Microphone connected to [INPUT1] terminal  
Microphone connected to [INPUT2] terminal  
[MIC]  
Use this setting when connecting to  
a dynamic microphone.  
[MIC+48]  
Use this setting when connecting to  
a microphone (phantom  
microphone) that requires a +48 V  
power supply.  
1
T
U
P
N
I
2
T
Memo :  
U
P
N
I
ꢀ
When “MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected, set the  
reference input level in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[A/V  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Input1 Mic Ref.]/[Input2  
Mic Ref.].  
UX  
A
PO  
WER  
/CHG  
CH1  
CH2  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
(' P107 [ Input1 Mic Ref. ] )  
INT  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
LINE  
MIC  
MIC  
(' P107 [ Input2 Mic Ref. ] )  
+48V  
LCD BRIGHT PEAKING  
FULL AUTO  
ON  
Caution :  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
ꢀ
When connecting a device that does not require  
a +48 V power supply, make sure that it is not  
set to the “MIC+48V” position.  
When the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode switch is  
set to “MIC”, make sure that a microphone is  
connected to the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal. If  
you increase the recording level when a  
microphone is not connected, noise from the  
input terminal may be recorded.  
CH1  
CH2  
OFF  
ꢀ
.
Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each  
Channel  
Select the audio to be recorded in CH1/CH2.  
ꢀ
When a microphone is not connected to the  
[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal, set the [INPUT1]/  
[INPUT2] mode switch to “LINE” or adjust the  
volume with the [CH1]/[CH2] recording level  
adjustment knob.  
-
Switch Setting  
INT  
Connected Devices  
CH1  
ꢀ Built-in Microphone  
ꢀ [MAiUcrXo]ptheormneincaol nnected to  
INPUT1  
INT  
Microphone connected to  
[INPUT1] terminal  
CH2  
ꢀ Built-in Microphone  
ꢀ [MAiUcrXo]ptheormneincaol nnected to  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
Microphone connected to  
[INPUT1] terminal  
Microphone connected to  
[INPUT2] terminal  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When “INT” is set, the built-in microphone is  
disabled if a microphone is connected to the  
[AUX] terminal; audio from the microphone  
connected to the [AUX] is recorded.  
When “INT” is selected, set the reference input  
level in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio Set]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Int. Mic Gain]/[AUX Gain].  
ꢀ
(' P107 [ Int. Mic Gain ] )  
(' P107 [ AUX Gain ] )  
60  
oꢀSetting Input Channel to “INT” for Both [CH1] and  
Adjusting Audio Recording Level  
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels  
for the two channels (CH1/CH2) manually or  
automatically.  
[CH2]  
ꢀ
Set the [CH1 AUTO/MANUAL] selection  
switch to “MANUAL”.  
ꢁ
Turn the [CH1] recording level adjustment  
knob to adjust the level.  
When the built-in microphone and the [AUX]  
input terminal are used, the recording levels of  
[CH1] and [CH2] are interlocked.  
CH1  
CH2  
INT  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
This is also effective when the [CH1 AUTO/  
MANUAL] selection switch is set to [CH2].  
LC  
FULL AUTO  
ON  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Memo :  
ꢀ
CH1  
CH2  
Select [Limiter], [AGC Response], [AGC Mode],  
or [Int. Mic Separation] in the menu to set the  
recording audio.  
OFF  
.
ꢀ
For the reference level to be recorded to an SD  
card, set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Ref. Level] to “-20dB”, “-18dB”, or  
“-12dB”. (common for CH1/CH2)  
Manual Adjustment Mode (Manual  
Adjustment)  
ꢀ
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch on  
the camera recorder to “MANUAL” to enter the  
manual adjustment mode, and use the [CH1]/  
[CH2] recording level adjustment knob to set the  
recording level.  
(' P107 [ Ref. Level ] )  
ꢀ
The operations of the [CH2] recording level  
adjustment knob and [CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]  
selection switch are disabled.  
ꢀ
You can adjust the level manually during the  
recording, recording standby, and stop modes.  
Automatic Adjustment Mode  
oꢀSetting Input Channel to “INPUT1”/“INPUT2”  
ꢀ
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection  
switch to “AUTO” or the [FULL AUTO] switch to  
“ON” to enter Automatic Adjustment mode. The  
audio recording level is set automatically  
according to the input level.  
ꢀ
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]  
selection switch to “MANUAL” for the  
channel to be adjusted manually.  
ꢁ
Turn the corresponding [CH1]/[CH2]  
recording level adjustment knob to adjust  
the level.  
ꢀ
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”,  
mode switching with the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/  
MANUAL] selection switch is disabled.  
When [Audio Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Limiter] is set to “Off”,  
adjust such that the audio level meter does not  
light up at -2 dB even for loud sounds.  
(' P107 [ Limiter ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio Set]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Limiter] is set to “Off” while in the automatic  
adjustment mode, the limiter operates at  
-5ꢀdBFS.  
00:00:00.00  
If [Limiter] is set to other than “Off”, the limiter  
operates according to the value set.  
(' P107 [ Limiter ] )  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
ꢀ
When [A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio On FULL  
AUTO] is set to “SW Set”, you can switch the  
audio recording mode with the [CH1/CH2  
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch on the  
camera recorder even if the [FULL AUTO]  
switch is set to “ON”.  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
4030 20 10  
0
(' P109 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )  
-2dB  
.
61  
Selecting Audio Output Method When the  
[MONITOR] Selection Switch Is Set to  
“BOTH”  
Monitoring Audio Sound  
During Recording Using a  
Headphone  
When a stereo type earphone jack is connected,  
perform the following setting to output stereo  
sound.  
You can check the recorded audio using  
ꢀ
Set the [MONITOR] selection switch to  
“BOTH”.  
headphone.  
ꢁ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Monitor] to “Stereo”.  
(' P109 [ Monitor ] )  
1
X
U
A
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can set the volume of the warning tone in  
[Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Alarm  
Level]. (“Off”/“Low”/“Middle”/“High”)  
(' P109 [ Alarm Level ] )  
2
3
MONITOR  
CH1  
BOTH  
CH2  
.
ꢀ
ꢁ
Connect the headphone.  
Select the channel to monitor with the  
[MONITOR] selection switch.  
Setting  
[CH1]  
Description  
Outputs the audio recorded in [CH1].  
[BOTH]  
Outputs the audio recorded in  
[CH1/CH2].  
[CH2]  
Outputs the audio recorded in [CH2].  
ꢂ
Use the [MONITOR +/-] button to adjust the  
monitor volume.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Audio during recording is not output from the  
monitor speaker.  
ꢀ
Warning tone is output when there is an  
abnormality in the camera recorder or when the  
battery is low.  
(' P160 [Warning Tone] )  
62  
Time Code Operation Mode  
Set the time code operation in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/  
UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator].  
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )  
Time Code and User’s Bit  
Time code and user’s bit data are recorded with the  
video in this camera recorder.  
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the  
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or  
recording. (Display screen)  
Setting  
Description  
Free Run(Ext) This mode synchronizes another  
camera recorder connected to the  
[TC] terminal. The time code  
operates in the run mode at all  
times regardless of the recording  
status.  
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit  
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the  
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or  
recording.  
It continues to run even when the  
power of the camera recorder is  
turned off.  
The display differs according to the menu settings.  
ꢀ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ[Display  
Free Run  
Rec Run  
The time code operates in the run  
mode at all times regardless of the  
recording status.  
Settings]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ[TC/UB] to settings other than  
“Off”.  
(' P105 [ TC/UB ] )  
When “TC” or “UB” is selected, time code or  
user’s bit data is displayed respectively on the  
display screen.  
It continues to run even when the  
power of the camera recorder is  
turned off.  
The time code operates in the run  
mode during recording. It  
continues to run in the order of the  
recorded clips as long as the SD  
card is not replaced. If the SD card  
is removed and recording is made  
on another card, time code will be  
recorded on the new card from  
where it was left off in the previous  
card.  
FF EE DD 20  
00:00:00. 00  
00:00:00.00  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
Regen  
The time code operates in the run  
mode during recording. When the  
SD card is replaced, the last time  
code recorded on the card is read  
and recorded on a new card so that  
the time code continues in running  
order.  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
.
Memo :  
(' P64 [Setting Time Code] )  
ꢀ
Values recorded on the SD card is displayed in  
Media mode.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”,  
“Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”, and [TC  
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free  
Run(Ext)”, Rec Run is activated.  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat]/  
[3Format] is set to “AVCHD”, Pre Rec enters  
Free Run mode.  
ꢀ
(' P111 [ ꢂ Format ] )  
(' P112 [ 3 Format ] )  
63  
Memo :  
Setting Time Code  
Generator  
Drop frame/non-drop frame mode  
ꢀ
When the frame rate setting in [Main Menu]ꢀ-  
[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-  
[Frame & Bit Rate] is “60p”, “60i”, or “30p”, the  
actual number of frames per second is  
approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the time  
code processing standard is “60p”, “60i”, or  
“30p” frames. To make up for the frame number  
discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop) drops  
the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except  
for minutes that are multiples of 10. However, in  
the case of “60p”, the 00, 01, 02 and 03 frame  
are dropped.  
Presetting the Time Code  
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the  
internal time code generator are recorded.  
This section describes how to set [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC  
Preset].  
(' P102 [ TC Preset ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[Frame & Bit Rate] is  
set to “50i(HQ)”, “50i(SP)”, “50p(HQ)”,  
“50p(SP)”, “25p(HQ)”, “24p(HQ)”, or “50i”,  
settings cannot be made in “Drop”.  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
ꢀ
The non-drop frame mode (Non Drop) does not  
drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with  
the actual time.  
Setting Time Code  
ꢀ
You can configure the setting without accessing  
the [TC/UB] menu screen.  
(' P66 [Setting Time Code without Opening  
the Menu] )  
MENU/THUMB  
Required Settings Before Preset  
CANCEL  
ꢀ
Set [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator] to “Rec Run”  
or “Free Run”.  
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
ꢀ
[Rec Run]:  
Preset data in the time code generator  
operates in run mode during recording  
mode. Set this when recording continuous  
time code in connecting frames.  
[Free Run]:  
OIS / 2  
LOLUX / 3  
CANCEL  
.
ꢀ
Time code starts to operate in run mode from  
ꢀ
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC  
Preset] and press the Set button (R).  
(' P102 [ TC Preset ] )  
the preset time in the time code generator.  
ꢁ
Select the framing mode for the time code  
generator (only when the frame rate setting  
is “60” or “30”).  
The [TC Preset] screen appears.  
Set using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[Drop  
Frame].  
(' P102 [ Drop Frame ] )  
1
ꢀ
[Drop]:  
Sets the run mode of the time code generator  
to drop frame mode. Use this setting when  
placing emphasis on the recording time.  
[Non Drop]:  
ꢀ
Sets the run mode of the time code generator  
to non-drop frame mode. Use this setting  
when placing emphasis on the number of  
frames.  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator] is set to  
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as “Regen”  
and cannot be selected.  
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )  
64  
ꢁ
ꢀ
Set the time code (hour, minute, second,  
frame).  
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[UB  
Preset] and press the Set button (R).  
(' P102 [ UB Preset ] )  
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the  
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-  
shaped button (JK) to change the values.  
The [UB Preset] setting screen appears.  
Cursor  
1
During non-drop  
.
frame  
During drop frame  
.
Memo :  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator] is set to  
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as “Regen”  
and cannot be selected.  
ꢀ
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.  
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).  
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )  
ꢂ
Check the values and press the Set button  
(R).  
ꢁ
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place  
the cursor at the item to set, then use the  
cross-shaped button (JK) to change the  
values.  
ꢀ
The time code is set and the screen returns  
to [TC/UB].  
ꢀ
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]  
button.  
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets  
between A and F can be specified for the user’s  
bit.  
ꢃ
Press the [MENU] button.  
Returns to the normal screen.  
Presetting the User’s Bit  
You can add an 8-digit hexadecimal number as the  
Cursor  
user’s bit to the recorded image.  
MENU/THUMB  
CANCEL  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.  
The cursor moves to the left.  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
ꢂ
Check the values and press the Set button  
OIS / 2  
LOLUX / 3  
(R).  
ꢀ
The time code is set and the screen returns  
CANCEL  
to [TC/UB].  
.
ꢀ
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]  
button.  
ꢃ
Press the [MENU] button.  
Returns to the normal screen.  
65  
Setting Time Code without Opening the  
Menu  
ꢃ
Check the values and press the Set button  
(R).  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The time code is set and the screen returns  
to the normal screen.  
MENU/THUMB  
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]  
button.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
CANCEL  
When the camera recorder is switched to Media  
mode during editing, editing will be canceled  
and the screen will close.  
ꢀ
When editing the time code, operation of the  
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] and [OIS/2] buttons that are  
configured in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera  
Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[User Switch Set] is disabled. The  
[OIS/2] button functions as the number reset  
button.  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
TIME CODE  
OIS / 2  
CANCEL  
.
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Settings cannot be made in the following cases.  
ꢀ
Recording Time Code in Continuation of  
the Recorded Time Code on SD Card  
[TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator] has been set to  
“Regen”.  
Menu screen is displayed.  
The camera recorder is not in the Camera  
mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
This camera recorder is equipped with the time  
code reader.  
ꢀ
Set [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator] to “Regen”.  
ꢀ
When the camera recorder enters from  
recording standby mode to recording mode,  
it reads the time code already recorded on  
the SD card and records the new time code  
in continuation of that value.  
Setting Time Code  
ꢀ
Set [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator] to settings  
other than “Regen”.  
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )  
Hold down the [MENU] button and press the  
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.  
The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.  
ꢀ
The same data as the user’s bit already  
recorded on the SD card is recorded.  
ꢁ
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator] is set to  
“Regen”, the framing mode of the time code  
follows the settings in [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[Drop Frame]  
instead of the clip settings.  
Cursor  
(' P102 [ Drop Frame ] )  
During drop frame  
During non-drop frame  
.
ꢂ
Set the time code (hour, minute, second,  
frame).  
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the  
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-  
shaped button (JK) to change the values.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.  
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).  
66  
Settings and Operation of the Camera  
Recorder  
Synchronizing Time Code  
on Another Camera  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Set to Camera mode.  
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )  
This camera recorder is equipped with a time code  
Set [TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC Generator] as follows.  
input/output terminal ([TC] terminal).  
ꢀ
Slave device:  
Connect another camera recorder to the [TC]  
terminal and synchronize to the time code.  
Select “Free Run(Ext)”.  
Master device:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Connect the [TC] terminal of the master  
device with the [TC] terminal of the slave  
device.  
Select “Free Run”.  
ꢂ
ꢃ
Set LCD monitor or viewfinder to Display 1  
screen.  
Set the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the master device  
to “OUT”, and the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the  
slave device to “IN”.  
Set the master device and run the time  
code.  
ꢀ
When the built-in time code generator is  
synchronized with the external time code  
data input, the ꢆ icon on Display 1 screen  
lights up.  
Master Device  
[OUT]  
ꢀ
When time code is not synchronized or time  
code input is not available, the ꢆ icon goes  
out.  
IN  
OUT  
1
T
U
P
IN  
2
T
U
P
IN  
TC  
BA  
TT  
.R  
EL  
EA  
SE  
X
AU  
A
00:00:00.00  
P
/C  
O
W
G
E
R
H
R
E
C
D
E
V
Jan 220
12 :34
IC  
E
A
HD/S  
D
V
S
B
DI  
H
DMI  
R
E
M
OT  
E
HOS  
T
D
C
5 . 6
ND 1 /
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
Slave Device  
(This Camera Recorder)  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
.
[IN]  
Memo :  
IN  
ꢀ
OUT  
The built-in time code generator will continue  
operation even when the master device is  
disconnected after synchronization.  
1
T
U
P
IN  
2
T
U
P
IN  
TC  
BA  
TT  
.R  
EL  
EA  
SE  
X
AU  
A
ꢀ
ꢀ
User’s bit will become data in the master device.  
While the [TC] terminal is connected, the time  
code may be out of synchronization when the  
[A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Video Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[HDMI/SDI Out]  
setting of the Master device and Slave device is  
being changed.  
P
/C  
O
W
G
E
R
H
R
EC  
D
E
V
IC  
E
A
V
HD  
/S  
SDI  
D
B
H
DMI  
R
E
M
OT  
E
HO  
ST  
D
C
.
(' P106 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )  
67  
Setting Zebra Pattern  
Setting Spot Meter  
When the luminance level range for displaying  
zebra patterns is specified, diagonal lines (zebra  
pattern) are displayed at areas with the specified  
luminance levels during shooting.  
The brightness of the object during shooting is  
displayed.  
This function is useful when setting video or stage  
lighting or when specifying camera exposure.  
A cursor indicating the location and the brightness  
(%) of that location are displayed in the images  
shown on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.  
ꢀ
Zebra patterns display the brightness of output  
video signals.  
ZEBRA/5  
(' P68 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )  
ꢀ
This function allows you to check the brightness  
of input images from the lens without depending  
onimageprocessingsuchasgammacurve. The  
dynamic range of the camera recorder is 400 %  
and a brightness range of 0 % to 400 % and  
above is displayed.  
T
O
A
U
SH  
PU  
.
ꢀ
Set the zebra display pattern.  
Select the display pattern in [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Shooting Assist]ꢀ-ꢀ[Zebra].  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Spot meter may not be consistent with the zebra  
display range. When [Camera Process]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema”, the 100IRE output  
is not consistent with the 100 % display.  
When an object of more than 400 % luminance  
is detected, it is displayed as “400 %”.  
(' P99 [ Gamma ] )  
ꢁ
Specify the brightness (luminance) level  
range for displaying zebra pattern.  
Specify the upper and lower limits of the  
luminance level in [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Shooting  
Assist]ꢀ-ꢀ[Zebra]ꢀ-ꢀ[Top] and [Bottom].  
Item  
Top  
Settings  
Options  
Upper luminance 5% - 100%, Over  
limit for displaying (in 5 % increments)  
[Zebra]  
MENU/THUMB  
Bottom Lower luminance 0% - 100% (in 5 %  
limit for displaying increments)  
[Zebra]  
CANCEL  
ꢂ
Display the zebra pattern.  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
Press the [ZEBRA/5] button to display the zebra  
pattern in the specified range.  
CANCEL  
.
ꢀ
Select one of the following from [Main  
Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[User Switch Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Spot Meter].  
(' P97 [ Spot Meter ] )  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
“Zebra” is assigned to [ZEBRA/5] button in  
factory default.  
ꢀ
“Zebra” can also be assigned to other user  
buttons.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
68  
When [Max & Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected  
A
Color of Frame  
Indicating the  
Position  
The cursors appear according to the setting  
Item  
Settings  
when the button is pressed.  
Green and yellow frames appear, and the  
brightness levels of these areas are displayed.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Max & Min  
Displays the  
Max: Green  
brightness (%)  
and positions of  
the brightest and  
darkest areas in  
the screen.  
Min: Yellow  
00:00:00.00  
282min  
100min  
50min  
Cursor  
(Green)  
Jan 24,2012  
12:34:56  
Brightness Indication  
5.6f t  
ND 1/64  
AE+6  
0dB  
Frames may also  
be stopped at the  
current positions.  
Cursor  
(Yellow)  
F1.6  
4030 20 10  
0
P 13000K  
1/100  
Max  
Displays the  
Green  
Yellow  
Green  
.
brightness (%)  
and position of the  
brightest area in  
the screen.  
B
Hold down the button in the state in A, the  
positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest  
(Min) areas in the screen are automatically  
detected with regard to the changes of the  
object, and the brightness level of these areas  
are displayed.  
Frames may also  
be stopped at the  
current positions.  
Min  
Displays the  
brightness (%)  
and position of the  
darkest area in the  
screen. Frame  
may also be  
00:00:00.00  
282min  
100min  
50min  
Cursor  
(Max: Green)  
Jan 24,2012  
12:34:56  
Brightness Indication  
5.6f t  
ND 1/64  
AE+6  
0dB  
stopped at the  
current positions.  
Cursor  
(Min:Yellow)  
F1.6  
4030 20 10  
0
P 13000K  
1/100  
Manual  
Displays the  
brightness (%) of (Blinks in green  
.
the specified  
position.  
when specifying  
the position)  
C
D
Pressing the button in the state in B stops the  
automatic position detection. The frames are  
fixed at the stopped positions and the  
brightness levels are displayed.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Assign the “Spot Meter” function to any of  
the user buttons.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
By pressing the button, the cursors and  
brightness indication disappear.  
Press the user button that is assigned with  
“Spot Meter”.  
00:00:00.00  
282min  
The operation switches as below when the  
button is pressed.  
100min  
50min  
Jan 24,,2012  
12:34:56  
5.6f t  
ND 1/64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
P 13000K  
.
69  
When [Manual] is selected  
A
Acquiring Positioning  
Information by GPS  
The brightness of the cursor position is  
displayed when the button is pressed.  
00:00:00.00  
282min  
100min  
50min  
This camera recorder comes with a built-in GPS  
function. The GPS function is able to record the  
positioning information.  
Cursor (Green)  
Jan 24,,2012  
12:34:56  
Brightness  
Indication  
During playback, you can also display the recorded  
information on the playback screen.  
(' P86 [Playing back] )  
5.6f t  
ND 1/64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
P 13000K  
ꢀ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[GPS] to  
.
“On”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Positioning starts when the ꢇ icon on the  
display screen starts blinking.  
B
By pressing the button, the cursors and  
brightness indication disappear.  
After positioning is complete, the ꢇ icon  
switches to a solid light and records the  
positioning information during shooting.  
The icon that appears on the screen  
changes according to the condition of signal  
reception from the GPS satellite.  
00:00:00.00  
282min  
100min  
50min  
Jan 24,,2012  
12:34:56  
ꢀ
5.6f t  
ND 1/64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
00:00:00.00  
P 13000K  
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
.
C
Hold down the button in the state in A or B, the  
cursor blinks in green.  
5 . 6f t  
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button  
(JKHI) to specify the position to display the  
brightness.  
4030 20 10  
0
.
When you decide on the position, press the Set  
button (R) to confirm.  
Reception  
Status  
Display  
Positioning Status  
[GPS] is set to GPS signal cannot  
00:00::00.00  
282min  
100min  
50min  
be received. UTC  
and positioning  
information cannot  
be obtained.  
“On”, but signal  
cannot be  
.
Jan 24,,2012  
12:34:56  
(Yellow)  
Brightness Indication  
received  
5.6f t  
ND 1/64  
AE+6  
0dB  
Cursor  
(Blinks in green)  
GPS search in UTC information  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
progress  
can be obtained, but  
not positioning  
information.  
P 13000K  
.
(Blink)  
.
GPS reception Receiving weak  
D
Frames are fixed at the stopped positions and  
the brightness is displayed.  
in progress (low GPS signal. UTC  
.
accuracy)  
and positioning  
information can be  
obtained.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When moving the cursor position, [Shutter]/[AE  
Level] control is disabled.  
When the brightness is 0 % in the entire screen,  
the frame is fixed in the center.  
GPS reception Receiving GPS  
ꢀ
ꢀ
in progress  
(medium  
signal. UTC and  
positioning  
.
If the cursor is outside the “4:3” range, changing  
[Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-  
[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[SD Aspect] from “16:9” to  
“4:3” restores the cursor to the default position.  
(' P112 [ SD Aspect ] )  
accuracy)  
information can be  
obtained.  
GPS reception Receiving strong  
in progress  
GPS signal. UTC  
.
(high accuracy) and positioning  
information can be  
obtained.  
(No  
GPS function is The [GPS] item is  
display)  
turned off  
set to “Off”.  
70  
Memo :  
C.REVIEW/7  
ꢀ
If positioning cannot be performed after waiting  
for several minutes, this means GPS reception  
is poor, and there is difficulty in receiving data.  
Move to an open place with no obstructions.  
Otherwise, GPS information will not be recorded  
when shooting is performed.  
1
T
U
P
IN  
2
T
U
P
IN  
BA  
TT  
.R  
EL  
EA  
SE  
X
AU  
A
P
/C  
O
W
ER  
G
H
R
E
C
ꢀ
Signal may not be received depending on  
circumstances such as locations that are  
indoors or surrounded by tall buildings, or the  
geographical conditions.  
D
E
V
IC  
E
A
H
D/S  
SD  
V
D
I
B
H
D
MI  
RE  
M
O
T
E
HOST  
D
C
.
Precision error may occur in the position  
information depending on the conditions of  
reception.  
ꢀ
Press the button assigned with the “Clip  
Review” function during standby (“STBY”  
is displayed).  
ꢀ
Even when positioning is in progress,  
information may be disrupted depending on the  
condition of signal reception.  
Playback of the configured section starts.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The video clip is played back according to the  
setting in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ-  
[User Switch Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Clip Review]. By default  
setting (Last 5sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip  
is played back.  
Viewing Recorded Videos  
Immediately (Clip Review)  
(' P97 [ Clip Review ] )  
When playback is complete, the camera  
recorder exits Clip Review and returns to  
“STBY” (recording standby) mode.  
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip  
on the screen.  
However, the video clip cannot be played back if  
the settings of the camera recorder are different  
from the video format (Resolution/Frame & Bit  
Rate/SD Aspect) of the clip.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL] and  
[REC] buttons are enabled.  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Resolution ] )  
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel clip review  
and return to “STBY” (recording standby) mode.  
Press the [REC] button to cancel clip review and  
enter recording mode. It will take some time to  
start recording after the button is pressed.  
When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the  
whole clip is played back.  
(' P112 [ 3 Resolution ] )  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
(' P112 [ 3 Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
(' P112 [ SD Aspect ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
To use this function, assign “Clip Review” to any  
of the user buttons. “Clip Review” is assigned to  
[C.REVIEW/7] button in factory default.  
“Clip Review” can also be assigned to other user  
buttons.  
Only video clips in the currently selected slot can  
be reviewed.  
When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip  
Review function is disabled.  
ꢀ
Clip Review is unavailable when Clip  
Continuous Rec is paused (“STBYC”, yellow  
text). To operate Clip Review, use the  
[CANCEL] button to set to “STBYC” (white text)  
first.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
(' P77 [Clip Continuous Rec] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Clip Review is unavailable when the camera  
recorder is connected to an external equipment  
and the equipment is in recording state.  
Clip Review is unavailable when operating View  
Remote via network connection.  
(' P148 [View Remote Feature] )  
71  
Recording  
Splitting the Clips Freely  
(Clip Cutter Trig)  
Simultaneously at Two  
Different Definitions  
You can split the clips freely without having to stop  
recording during shooting.  
By setting [System] to “HD+SD” or “HD+Web”, you  
can record simultaneously at two different  
definitions.  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Assign the “Clip Cutter Trig” function to  
any of the user buttons.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
ꢀ
When HD+SD is selected:  
Records a high-definition (HD) file to slot A and  
a standard definition (SD) file to slot B at the  
same time.  
Press the user button that is assigned with  
“Clip Cutter Trig” during shooting.  
[CLIP CUT] appears on the display screen and  
the clip is split.  
ꢀ
When HD+Web is selected:  
Records a high-definition (HD) file to slot A and  
a low bit-rate web file to slot B at the same time.  
Web files can be used as a proxy file for the HD  
file.  
REC  
00:00:00.00  
100min  
50min  
Jan 24,2012  
Memo :  
CLIP CUT  
CLIP CUT  
ꢀ
If a recordable SD card is inserted into only one  
of the slots, files will only be recorded to that slot.  
The [Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.  
Clip Cutter Trig is disabled.  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
.
[Slot Mode] cannot be selected.  
Clip Review can only be performed for slot A.  
(“No Media” appears if there is no card in slot A  
while a card is inserted into slot B.)  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Clips cannot be split again for a few seconds  
after the operation is performed.  
This item cannot be used when [Slot Mode] is  
set to “Backup”.  
ꢀ
Playback of web files is only possible from slot  
B when “HD+Web” is selected.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Available only when [System] is set to “HD” or  
“SD”.  
(' P74 [Backup Rec] )  
This item cannot be used when [Rec Mode] is  
set to a value other than “Normal” or “Pre Rec”.  
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
The split clips are recorded seamlessly without  
interruptions in the video.  
72  
ꢁ
Dual Rec  
Start recording.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Insert recordable media in both slots, and  
press the [REC] button.  
ꢀ
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards  
in the factory default ([Slot Mode] is set to  
“Series”), pressing the [REC] button starts  
recording only to the media in the selected slot.  
When the remaining space in the selected  
media runs out, recording continues by  
automatically activating the media in the other  
slot.  
IntheDualRecmode, recordingtothemedia  
in both slots starts at the same time.  
Both the card slot marks turn red, and the  
status indicators of both the card slots also  
light up in red.  
REC  
00:00:00.00  
100min  
50min  
ꢀ
ꢀ
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards  
in the Dual Rec mode ([Slot Mode] is set to  
“Dual”), pressing the [REC] button starts  
recording simultaneously to the media in both  
the slots.  
Lit in red  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
The clips recorded to the media in both the slots  
are identical, and two clips of the same content  
can be created only on this camera recorder.  
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )  
Pꢁ13000K  
.
ꢂ
Stop recording.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button again.  
Recording to both slots stops, and both the  
card slot marks turn white.  
REC  
ꢀ
The same clips are recorded to both cards.  
HOLD  
00:00:00.00  
100min  
50min  
1
T
U
P
IN  
A
2
T
U
P
IN  
White  
BA  
TT  
.
R
E
LE  
A
SE  
X
U
A
A
P
/C  
O
W
ER  
G
H
R
E
C
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
DE  
4030 20 10  
0
V
IC  
E
Pꢁ13000K  
A
H
V
D/  
S
D
S
B
DI  
.
HDM  
I
R
E
C
B
R
E
M
O
T
E
HO  
ST  
Memo :  
DC  
ꢀ
During recording in the Dual Rec mode, both the  
.
card slot marks light up in red.  
ꢀ
During recording in the Dual Rec mode to two  
cards with a different amount of remaining  
space, if the space of one card runs out,  
recording to both slots will stop automatically.  
After recording stops, recording automatically  
resumes for the card with remaining space.  
Although the clips are separated in this case, the  
clips can be seamlessly joined by arranging  
themonthetimelineoftheeditingsoftwaresince  
they are recorded seamlessly.  
Setting to Dual Rec Mode  
ꢀ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Slot Mode] to “Dual”.  
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )  
“DUAL” appears on the display screen.  
00:00:00.00  
n 24,2012  
2 :34 :56  
ꢀ
If the last clip on the cards that are inserted in the  
two slots are different from each other, and the  
time code operating mode is set to “Regen”, the  
Regen mode for the selected card slot will be  
enabled in the next recording.  
DUAL  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
.
73  
Caution :  
Backup Rec  
ꢀ
To perform recording in the Dual Rec mode, it is  
recommended that you start recording by  
making use of two cards with the same capacity  
and from the formatted state.  
ꢀ
The Backup Rec mode allows you to make use  
of the media in slot B for backup recording by  
controlling the starting and stopping of recording  
in slot B without using the [REC] button.  
Start or stop the recording using [Main Menu]ꢀ-  
[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Slot Mode]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Backup Rec] or press the user button that is  
assigned with “Backup Trig”.  
ꢀ
You can combine the use of the Dual Rec mode  
with a special recording mode. While in the Dual  
Rec mode, you can also set [Rec Mode] to  
“Normal”, “Pre Rec”, “Clip Continuous”, “Interval  
Rec”, “Frame Rec”, or “Variable Frame”. When  
ꢀ
[Main Menu]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ[System]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ  
-ꢀ  
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )  
[Record Format]ꢀ  
-
ꢀ[ Format] is set to “AVCHD”,  
ꢂ
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )  
“Clip Continuous” cannot be selected.  
(' P76 [Special Recording] )  
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
Slot A starts  
recording  
Slot B stops  
recording  
Slot B starts  
recording  
Slot A stops  
recording  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Format ] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When both slots are inserted with recordable  
cards, the Dual Rec (simultaneous recording)  
operation can be performed. If a recordable  
media is only inserted in one of the slots, you can  
also start recording with one card.  
Clip 2  
Clip 2  
Slot A  
Slot B  
In the Dual Rec mode, continuous recording by  
switching from one slot to another cannot be  
performed. Continuous recording will not be  
performed if a recordable media is inserted in a  
slot after recording to the other slot has started.  
When recording to one slot is in progress with  
the recorder set to the Dual Rec mode, inserting  
a recordable media to the other slot does not  
enable the Dual Rec operation. To perform the  
Dual Rec operation, stop recording temporarily  
(excluding pausing recording in the Clip  
Continuous Rec mode), and start again.  
When one of the cards is accidentally removed  
while recording is in progress in the Dual Rec  
mode, recording to the card in the other slot will  
continue. However, repair of the accidentally  
removed card by the recovery function may fail.  
If an error occurs on one of the cards while  
recording is in progress in the Dual Rec mode,  
recording of the erroneous card stops, while that  
of the other card continues.  
Clip 1  
Clip 3  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
During the Backup Rec mode (when [Slot  
Mode] is set to “Backup”), you can control  
recording to the 2 slots at different timings, and  
backup recording can only be performed on this  
camera recorder.  
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )  
ꢀ
You can record without worrying about missing  
the important scenes by setting slot B to be  
always recording (backup recording) and using  
the [REC] button to start/stop recording of only  
the required scenes in slot A.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
It is recommended to use a media with high  
capacity in slot B.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat] is set to  
“AVCHD”, backup recording cannot be  
performed.  
Operations on clips recorded in the Dual Rec  
mode, such as clip deletion in the Media mode  
or appending of OK marks, can only be  
performed on the card in the selected slot.  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Format ] )  
74  
ꢀ
ꢂ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Slot Mode] to “Backup”.  
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )  
Start normal recording (normal recording  
into slot A)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Press any of the [REC] buttons.  
Recording into the media in slot A starts.  
(The characters “RREC” appear in red.)  
The card icon of slot A turns red (unselected  
state), and the status indicator of slot A blinks  
in red.  
“BACKUP” appears on the display screen.  
ꢀ
00:00:00.00  
4,2012  
4 :56  
BACKUP  
Red (not selected)  
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
00:00:00.00  
100min  
50min  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
.
100min  
50min  
ꢁ
Start backup recording. (Backup recording  
into slot B)  
AE+6  
ꢀ
Select “REC” in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Slot Mode]ꢀ-ꢀ[Backup  
Rec] and press the Set button (R).  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢁ13000K  
.
ꢃ
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )  
Stop normal recording.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Press any of the [REC] buttons again.  
Recording to slot A stops, and the card slot  
mark of slot A turns white (unselected state).  
The characters “RREC” (red) changes back  
to “STBY” (white).  
You can also press the user button that is  
assigned with “Backup Trig”.  
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Backup recording into slot B starts. (The  
characters “BACKUP” appear in red.)  
The card slot mark of slot B turns red  
(selected state), and the status indicator of  
slot B also blinks in red.  
The status indicator of slot A goes out.  
ꢀ
White (not selected)  
00:00:00.00  
100min  
50min  
Red  
00:00:00.00  
100min  
50min  
100min  
50min  
AE+6  
100min  
50min  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢁ13000K  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
.
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢁ13000K  
Red (selected)  
.
75  
ꢄ
Stop backup recording.  
Special Recording  
Besides the normal recording mode, five special  
recording methods are available in this camera  
recorder. They are Pre Rec, Clip Continuous,  
Frame Rec, Interval Rec and Variable Frame.  
Select a mode from [Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode].  
ꢀ
Select [STBY] in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Slot Mode]ꢀ-ꢀ[Backup  
Rec] and press the Set button (R).  
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )  
ꢀ
You can also press the user button that is  
assigned with “Backup Trig”.  
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Recording to slot B stops, and the card slot  
mark of slot B turns white (unselected state).  
The characters “BACKUP” changes back to  
white.  
ꢀ
Set using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode].  
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat] is set to  
“AVCHD”, “Clip Continuous” cannot be  
selected.  
The status indicator of slot B lights up in  
green.  
White  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Format ] )  
00:00:00.00  
100min  
50min  
ꢀ
Pre Rec  
100min  
50min  
ꢀ
By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec  
Time], you can start recording video and audio  
before actual recording starts based on the [Pre  
Rec Time] setting.  
AE+6  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢁ13000K  
.
ꢀ
ꢀ
When starting actual recording while the camera  
recorder is in Recording Standby (STBYP)  
mode, you can start recording a few seconds  
earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time] setting.  
Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete  
event without missing the initial scenes even if  
you start the recording late.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
During backup recording, if the space of one  
card runs out, recording stops only for the card  
that is full.  
When recording to both slots is stopped,  
recording in the Regen mode will be enabled for  
the card slot in which recording started.  
When recording is started in the other slot while  
recording to one slot, the clip being recorded is  
split and simultaneous recording to the other  
card starts.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Pre Rec Time can be set to “5sec”, “10sec”, or  
“15sec” in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode]ꢀ-ꢀ[Pre Rec Time].  
(' P113 [ Pre Rec Time ] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When recording is stopped for either slot A or B  
while recording to both slots, the clip on the slot  
which is still recording is split.  
Completed Clip  
Although the clips are separated during  
recording the clips can be seamlessly joined by  
arranging them on the timeline of the editing  
software since they are recorded seamlessly.  
Clip Cutter Trig cannot be performed during  
backup recording.  
(Recorded video and audio)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Recording starts a  
number of seconds  
earlier based on the  
[Pre Rec Time] setting  
(' P72 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter  
Trig)] )  
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, [Rec  
Mode] can only be set to “Normal”.  
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
Press [REC]  
Press [REC]  
(Recording starts) (Recording stops)  
.
76  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Set [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.  
Press [REC]  
Press [REC]  
Press [REC]  
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
(Recording starts) (Recording resumes)  
(Recording resumes)  
ꢀ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.  
The display changes (“STBY”ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYP”).  
Press [REC]  
Press [REC]  
Press and hold [REC]  
(Recording pauses) (Recording pauses) (Recording stops)  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button to start recording in  
Pre Rec mode.  
Recording 1  
Recording 2  
Recording 3  
ꢀ
The display changes (“STBYP”ꢀ-ꢀ  
“RRECP”) and the card slot status indicator  
lights up in red.  
Completed Clip  
(Recorded video and audio)  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button again to pause  
recording. The display changes (“RRECP”  
ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYP”) and the card slot status  
indicator lights up in green.  
Recording 1 Recording 2 Recording 3  
.
ꢀ
Set “Rec Mode” to “Clip Continuous”.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
When the interval between start and stop  
recording is short, “STBYP” may not be  
displayed immediately after recording is  
complete.  
ꢀ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode] to “Clip Continuous”.  
The display changes (“STBY”ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYC”).  
ꢀ
“RRECP”ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYP” (“STBY” blinks in red)  
-ꢀ“STBYP” is displayed.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Start recording. (Recording 1)  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button to start recording in  
Clip Continuous mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the SD card becomes full during  
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is  
displayed.  
ꢀ
The display changes (“STBYC”ꢀ-ꢀ  
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator  
lights up in red.  
Video and audio before the above mentioned  
time may not be recorded after recording starts  
in the following cases.  
Pause recording.  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button again to pause  
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”  
ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYC” (yellow text)).  
ꢀ
Immediately after power on  
ꢀ
Immediately after recording stops  
ꢀ
Immediately after switching from Media  
ꢀ
The card slot status indicator remains lighted  
mode to Camera mode  
ꢀ
in red.  
Immediately after setting [Rec Mode]  
Immediately after the end of Clip Review  
Immediately after changing file format  
Immediately after changing video format  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Memo :  
ꢀ
When the [CANCEL] button is pressed while the  
camera recorder is paused (STBYC), the  
display changes (“STBYC” (yellow text) -ꢀ  
“STBYC” (blinking yellow text) -ꢀ“STBYC”  
(white text)), and a “clip” is generated. The card  
slot status indicator lights up in green.  
Clip Continuous Rec  
ꢀ
In normal recording, when the recording stops,  
the image, audio, and accompanying data from  
the start till the end of the recording are recorded  
as one “clip” on the SD card.  
ꢃ
Resume recording. (Recording 2)  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button again to resume  
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”  
(yellow text) -ꢀ“RRECC”).  
ꢀ
This mode allows you to consolidate several  
rounds of “startstop recording” into one clip.  
Example:  
ꢀ
The card slot status indicator remains lighted  
in red.  
In normal recording, three clips are generated as  
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.  
However, recording in this mode generates only  
one clip.  
77  
Caution :  
ꢄ
ꢅ
ꢆ
ꢇ
Pause recording.  
ꢀ
If the power is cut off due to low battery power,  
a proper clip may not be generated.  
When [ꢂFormat]/[3Format] in the [Main  
Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Format] menu is set to “AVCHD”, Clip  
Continuous Rec cannot be performed.  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Format ] )  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button again to pause  
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”  
ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYC” (yellow text)).  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The card slot status indicator remains lighted  
in red.  
Resume recording. (Recording 3)  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button again to resume  
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”  
(yellow text) -ꢀ“RRECC”).  
(' P112 [ 3 Format ] )  
ꢀ
The card slot status indicator remains lighted  
Frame Rec  
in red.  
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the  
image and accompanying data from the start till the  
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on  
the SD card.  
Press and hold the [REC] button.  
ꢀ
Recording stops and the display changes  
(“RRECC”ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYC”). A “clip” is  
generated.  
In this mode, recording starts with every press of  
the [REC] button, and only the specified number of  
frames is recorded.  
ꢀ
The card slot status indicator lights up in  
green.  
The recording can be written to the media as a  
single clip until it is stopped.  
Press the [REC] button again.  
ꢀ
The display changes (“STBYC”ꢀ-ꢀ  
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator  
lights up in red.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Audio will not be recorded.  
ꢀ
A new “clip” is generated from here.  
Until a specified amount of recordings is  
accumulated, the file cannot be written to the  
media.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The following operations cannot be performed  
ꢀ
ꢀ
If the specified amount is not reached when  
recording is stopped, normal recording is  
performed and frames are added to the ending  
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)  
After the specified number of frames is recorded  
and written to the media, recording will be  
performed until the same number is  
accumulated again.  
while recording is paused (STBYC, yellow text).  
ꢀ
Clip Review operation  
(' P71 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately  
(Clip Review)] )  
ꢀ
Switching SD card slots  
ꢀ
Switching operation mode  
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )  
ꢀ
Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)  
regardless of the menu settings.  
Press [REC]  
Press and hold [REC]  
(Frame Rec stops)  
Press [REC]  
(Frame Rec starts)  
Caution :  
ꢀ
Press [REC]  
Do not remove the SD card during recording  
(RRECC, red text) or recording pause  
(STBYC, yellow text).  
Recording resumes Recording resumes  
ꢀ
To remove the SD card in the “Clip Continuous”  
mode, press the [CANCEL] button, check that  
“STBYC” (white text) is displayed and the card  
slot status indicator lights up in green before you  
remove the card.  
Normal recording  
(Padding data)  
Pause  
Pause  
Pause  
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]  
Actual clips recorded to the media  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the SD card becomes full during  
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is  
displayed.  
Specific amount of data  
When the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is  
turned off during recording or recording pause,  
recording stops and power is cut off after a clip  
is generated.  
.
78  
Interval Rec  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢂ
Set [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.  
ꢀ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the  
image and accompanying data from the start till the  
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on  
the SD card.  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.  
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
ꢀ
The display changes (“STBY”ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYꢈ”).  
In this mode, recording and pause are performed  
repeatedly at the specified time interval. Only the  
specified number of frames is recorded.  
The recording can be written to the media as a  
single clip until it is stopped.  
Set the number of frames to record in [Rec  
Frames].  
ꢀ
Set using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-  
[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Frames].  
(' P113 [ Rec Frames ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Audio will not be recorded.  
Start recording.  
Until a specified amount of recordings is  
accumulated, the file will not be written to the  
media.  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button to record only the  
number of frames specified in [Rec  
Frames] and pause.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
After the specified number of frames is recorded  
and written to the media, recording will be  
performed until the same number is  
accumulated again.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The display changes (“STBYꢈ”ꢀ-ꢀ“RRECꢈ”  
ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYꢈ” (yellow text)).  
The card slot status indicator lights up in  
green.  
If the specified amount is not reached when  
recording is stopped, normal recording is  
performed and frames are added to the ending  
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)  
ꢃ
Repeat Frame Rec.  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button again to record only  
the number of frames specified in [Rec  
Frames] and pause.  
Press [REC]  
Press [REC]  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The display changes (“STBYꢈ”ꢀ-ꢀ“RRECꢈ”  
ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYꢈ” (yellow text)).  
(Interval Rec starts)  
(Interval Rec stops)  
Frame Rec continues until the recording is  
stopped (step 5).  
Recording resumes Recording resumes  
[Rec Interval]  
[Rec Interval]  
ꢄ
Press and hold the [REC] button.  
ꢀ
The card slot status indicator lights up in  
green.  
Normal recording  
Caution :  
ꢀ
Pause  
Pause  
Pause  
(Padding data)  
Do not remove the SD card during recording  
(“RRECꢈ”, red text) or recording pause  
(“STBYꢈ”, yellow text).  
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]  
ꢀ
To remove the SD card during Frame Rec, press  
the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYꢈ”  
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status  
indicator lights up in green before you remove  
the card.  
Actual clips recorded to the media  
Specific amount of data  
.
ꢀ
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC  
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free  
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec  
Run”.  
ꢀ
Set [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.  
ꢀ
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.  
(' P113 [ Rec Interval ] )  
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears  
in the audio level meter display.  
ꢀ
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBYꢉ”).  
ꢁ
(' P121 [Audio Level Meter] )  
Set the number of frames to record in [Rec  
Frames].  
Set using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Frames].  
(' P113 [ Rec Frames ] )  
79  
ꢂ
ꢃ
Set the time interval to start recording in  
[Interval Rec].  
Set using [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode]ꢀꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Interval].  
(' P113 [ Rec Interval ] )  
Start recording.  
ꢀ
Press the [REC] button to record only the  
number of frames specified in [Rec  
Frames] and pause.  
ꢀ
After the specified time in [Rec Interval] has  
passed, recording starts again to record only  
the number of frames specified in [Rec  
Frames] and pause.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Interval Rec continues until the recording is  
stopped.  
The display changes (“STBYꢉ”ꢀ-ꢀ“RRECꢉ”  
ꢀ-ꢀ“STBYꢉ” (red text) -ꢀ“RRECꢉ”ꢀ-ꢀ  
“STBYꢉ” (red text)).  
The card slot status indicator blinks in green.  
ꢄ
Press and hold the [REC] button.  
ꢀ
The card slot status indicator lights up in  
green.  
ꢀ
The display becomes “STBYꢉ”.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
Do not remove the SD card during recording  
(RRECꢉ, red text) or recording pause (STBYꢉ,  
yellow text).  
ꢀ
To remove the SD card during Interval Rec,  
pressthe[CANCEL] button, checkthat “STBYꢉ”  
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status  
indicator lights up in green before you remove  
the card.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC  
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free  
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec  
Run”.  
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears  
in the audio level meter display.  
(' P121 [Audio Level Meter] )  
80  
Variable Frame Rec  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[AE  
LEVEL SW] is set to “AE LEVEL/VFR”, you can  
use the cross-shaped button (HI) to select the  
frame rate during Variable Frame Rec. In modes  
other than Variable Frame Rec, the cross-  
shaped button (HI) functions as the AE level  
setting button.  
Shooting in this mode allows you to obtain smooth  
slow motion or quick motion videos.  
Using different frame rate settings for recording  
and playback, videos captured at normal speed  
can be played back more smoothly than those in  
low or high speed playback.  
To enable Variable Frame Rec, the following two  
settings are required at the same time.  
(' P95 [ AE Level ] )  
ꢀ
If the specified amount is not reached when  
recording is stopped, normal recording is  
performed and frames are added to the ending  
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂResolution]/  
[3Resolution] is set to “1920x1080” or  
“1280x720”.  
[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]/  
[3Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “30p(HQ)”,  
“24p(HQ)”, or “25p(HQ)”.  
Caution :  
ꢀ
The shooting frame rate cannot be changed  
during recording. To change the frame rate, stop  
the recording first and perform the change.  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/UB]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC  
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free  
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec  
Run”.  
Number of Frames that can be Set  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Set [ꢂResolution] and [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate].  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Resolution ] )  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
[ꢂResolution]:  
ꢀ
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears  
in the audio level meter display.  
Set to “1920x1080” or “1280x720”.  
[ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]:  
(' P121 [Audio Level Meter] )  
Set to “30p(HQ)”, “24p(HQ)”, or “25p(HQ)”.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Set [Rec Mode] to “Variable Frame”.  
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode] to “Variable Frame”.  
Select a recording frame rate from  
[ꢂFrame & Bit Rate].  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
The selectable frame rates are as shown in the  
table below.  
Resolution  
1920x1080  
Frame & Bit Rate  
30p(HQ)  
Selectable Shooting Frame Rate  
-
30  
27, 25, 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10,  
6, 2  
24p(HQ)  
25p(HQ)  
30p(HQ)  
30, 27, 25  
24  
25  
30  
22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6, 2  
24, 22.5, 20, 18, 12.5, 10, 6, 2  
-
1280x720  
60, 54, 50, 48, 45, 40,  
27, 25, 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10,  
36, 32  
6, 2  
24p(HQ)  
25p(HQ)  
60, 54, 50, 48, 45, 40,  
36, 32, 30, 27, 25  
50, 48, 45, 40, 36, 32  
Slow motion  
24  
22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6, 2  
25  
Standard  
24, 22.5, 20, 18, 12.5, 10, 6, 2  
Quick motion  
Effect during playback  
81  
F
[OIS/2] Button  
Playing Recorded Clips  
ꢀ
Switches the selection status of the clip  
selected by the cursor.  
To play back clips recorded on SD cards, switch to  
ꢀ
Clips being selected are displayed with  
check mark.  
the Media mode.  
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button in  
Camera mode to enter Media mode. A thumbnail  
screen of the clips recorded on the SD card is  
displayed.  
G
H
[LOLUX/3] Button  
Enters the action selection screen.  
[DISPLAY] Button  
You can play back the selected clip on the  
thumbnail screen.  
Switches between the “Standard Screen” and  
“Detailed Screen”.  
Memo :  
I
[STATUS] Button  
Displays the media information screen.  
ꢀ
When an SD card without any clips is inserted,  
ꢀ
“No Clips” is displayed.  
Thumbnail Screen  
Operation Buttons  
Use the operation buttons, on the side control  
panel of the camera recorder or the LCD monitor,  
to operate the thumbnail screen.  
ꢀ
“Standard Screen” and “Detailed Screen” are  
available.  
Use the [DISPLAY] button to switch between the  
screens.  
ꢀ
Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording  
from the oldest to most recent.  
DISPLAY STATUS  
A
MENU/THUMB  
Standard screen  
D
J
I
B
A
B
I
H
CANCEL  
C
C
D
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
A
B
H
G
D
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
OIS / 2  
LOLUX / 3  
E
F
TIME CODE  
CANCEL  
.
E
F
G
C
.
A
SD Card Information  
ꢀ
Displays the status of the inserted SD card,  
selected SD card, write-protect switch, and  
the need for restoring.  
A
[MENU/THUMB] Button  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Displays the menu.  
Press this button to close the menu screen  
during menu display and return to the  
thumbnail screen.  
ꢀ
Use the [SLOT A/B] switch to switch slots.  
Clips in slot A and B cannot be displayed at  
the same time.  
B
C
[CANCEL] (Stop) Button  
Cancels settings and returns to the previous  
screen.  
ꢂ 2 Write-protect switch of the SD card  
:
in slot A is set.  
SD card in slot B needs to be  
restored or formatted, or is an  
unsupported SD card.  
:
Set (Play) Button  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the values and items. (Confirm)  
Plays back the selected clip.  
B
Clip Mark  
Displays the clip information (properties).  
D
E
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)  
Moves the cursor.  
E
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button  
A
B
ꢀ
Switches the OK mark of the clip selected by  
the cursor.  
D
C
ꢀ
If an OK mark has been appended, it will be  
deleted. Otherwise, an OK mark will be  
appended.  
.
A
OK Mark  
Clip is appended with OK mark.  
82  
Memo :  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Dependent on the settings for [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[System], [ꢂResolution]/[3Resolution], and  
[ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]/[3Frame & Bit Rate].  
(' P111 [ System ] )  
ꢀ
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be  
deleted on the camera recorder.  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat] is set to  
“AVCHD”, the OK mark indicates that the clip is  
protected.  
ꢀ
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
ꢀ
When [Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat] is set to  
“AVCHD”, you may not be able to play back files  
recorded on a camera recorder other than the  
GY-HM600 and GY-HM650 series.  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Format ] )  
B
C
Continued From Mark  
This mark indicates that the current clip is  
continued from another SD card when  
recording is divided and made on several SD  
cards.  
If the file cannot be played back, the above  
thumbnail substitution display 2 is displayed.  
E
F
Clip Name  
Uneditable Mark  
The file name (clip number) of the selected clip  
is displayed.  
ꢀ
This mark indicates that an OK mark cannot  
be appended to or deleted from the clip, and  
the clip cannot be deleted.  
Operation Guide  
ꢀ
Displays a guide for the current operation  
buttons.  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat] is set  
to “AVCHD”, clips that are not recorded on  
this camera recorder cannot be edited.  
ꢀ
The action selection screen is displayed  
when the User 3 ([LOLUX/3]) button is  
pressed.  
(' P84 [Actions] )  
D
E
Continue Mark  
G
Recording Start Time  
This mark indicates that recording of the current  
clip is continued to another SD card when  
recording is divided and made on several SD  
cards.  
Displays the recording start time of the clip.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Data/time display depends on the [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Date Style]/[Time Style]  
settings in the [Main Menu] screen.  
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )  
Check Mark  
ꢀ
A green check mark is displayed when the  
clip is selected.  
ꢀ
Magenta and gray check marks are  
displayed in multiple selection mode.  
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )  
(' P89 [Selecting and Performing  
H
Scroll Bar  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Indicates the scroll position.  
Operations on Multiple Clips] )  
Black space below the scroll bar (white)  
indicates that there are more pages.  
When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,  
this indicates the last page.  
C
D
Cursor  
Clip to be worked on. Use the cross-shaped  
ꢀ
button (JKHI) to move the cursor.  
Thumbnail Substitution Display  
I
J
Remaining Battery Power  
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )  
A
B
Number of Clips  
ꢀ
If none of the clips are selected, the “running  
number/total number of clips” of the clip to be  
displayed appears.  
.
ꢀ
A
Even if only one clip is selected, the number  
of selected clips in the current slot is  
displayed.  
A clip with corrupted management information.  
It cannot be played back even if you press the  
Set (Play) button.  
B
A clip that cannot be played back nor displayed  
in thumbnail with the current video format  
settings.  
It cannot be played back even if you press the  
Set (Play) button.  
83  
Detailed screen  
* Items that are common with the Standard screen  
will not be described. Refer to “[Standard  
screen] P 82”.  
Actions  
The action selection screen is displayed when the  
User 3 ([LOLUX/3]) button is pressed.  
You can perform the following operations.  
Item  
Description  
A
B
Select All Clips Selects all clips.  
Select OK  
Marked  
Selects all clips appended with  
OK mark.  
Select Range  
Specifies the range when  
selecting multiple clips.  
(' P89 [Selecting Multiple  
Clips Randomly] )  
C
.
Deselect All  
Add OK Mark  
Clears all clip selections.  
Appends an OK mark.  
A
B
Thumbnail  
Thumbnail of the clip selected by the cursor.  
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to move the  
cursor.  
ꢀ
This Clip:  
Appends an OK mark to the  
clip pointed by the cursor.  
Selected Clips:  
Scroll Mark (DE)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
If there are previous clips, D appears on the  
left.  
Appends an OK mark to the  
clips selected (appended  
with check mark).  
All Clips:  
If there are more clips, E appears on the  
right.  
ꢀ
The marks will not be displayed if there are  
no clips before and after the current clip.  
Appends an OK mark to all  
clips.  
C
Metadata  
Delete OK Mark Deletes the OK mark.  
Metadata of the clip pointed by the cursor.  
You can use the cross-shaped button (JK) to  
scroll.  
ꢀ
This Clip:  
Deletes the OK mark of the  
clip pointed by the cursor.  
Selected Clips:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Deletes the OK mark of the  
clips selected (appended  
with check mark).  
All Clips:  
ꢀ
Deletes the OK mark of all  
clips.  
84  
Item  
FTP Upload  
Description  
Uploads a clip to the FTP server.  
ꢀ
This Clip:  
Uploads the clip pointed by  
the cursor.  
ꢀ
Selected Clips:  
Uploads the clips selected  
(appended with check  
mark).  
ꢀ
All Clips:  
Uploads all clips.  
Delete Clips  
Deletesclip. However, clipswith  
OK mark cannot be deleted.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
This Clip:  
Deletes the clip pointed by  
the cursor.  
Selected Clips:  
Deletes the clips selected  
(appended with check  
mark).  
ꢀ
All Clips:  
Deletes all clips.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The object of action is the clip of the current slot  
being displayed.  
[SelectedClips]cannotbeperformedifthereare  
no selected (appended with check mark) clips.  
[This Clip] cannot be performed if there are more  
than one selected (appended with check mark)  
clips.  
ꢀ
If the write-protect switch of an SD card is set,  
OK mark cannot be appended or deleted, and  
the clips cannot be deleted.  
85  
Time Code Playback  
Playing back  
Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SD card can  
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel  
be displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
of the camera recorder to play back.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The time code is also superimposed on the  
video signal output from the [HD/SD SDI] output  
terminal.  
ꢀ
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD SDI] output  
terminal is used as a flag to determine valid  
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will  
not be output.  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
A
B
ꢀ
If a section without time code is played back, the  
time code will stop. However, playback will  
continue.  
C
CANCEL  
.
Displaying Information during Shooting  
A
IW Button  
During playback, pressing the [DISPLAY] button  
shows the display screen.  
ꢀ
Plays back/pauses the clip pointed by the  
cursor.  
Pressing the [AE LOCK/4] button switches the  
display information during shooting between no  
display, camera information display, and GPS  
display.  
ꢀ
You can press the cross-shaped button (HI)  
to perform frame-by-frame forward playback  
during pause mode.  
B
S/T Button  
ꢀ
The GPS display displays information on the  
recording location of the video being played  
back only when GPS information has been  
recorded.  
Skips in the reverse or forward direction.  
O/N Button  
During Playback:  
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward  
direction.  
ꢀ
Camera information display displays only  
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White  
Balance that have been recorded.  
While paused:  
Frame-by-frame playback in the reverse or  
forward direction.  
C
o Button  
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
Stops playback.  
ꢀ
In the thumbnail screen, move the cursor to  
the clip to be played back.  
Pꢁ13000K  
AE LOCK/4  
Camera Information  
Display  
Hide  
Move the cursor to the clip to be played back  
using the cross-shaped button (JKHꢀI).  
AE LOCK/4  
ꢁ
Press the playback/pause button.  
Playback of the selected clip starts.  
+35.483197  
Audio Output during Playback  
+139.652172  
Oct 30,2012  
07:01:58PM  
AE LOCK/4  
ꢀ
You can confirm the playback sound from the  
monitor speaker, or the headphone connected  
to the [+] terminal. When a headphone is  
connected to the [+] terminal, sound cannot be  
output from the monitor speaker.  
GPS Display  
.
Memo :  
(' P135 [Connecting the Headphone] )  
Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker and  
headphone using the [MONITOR +/-] volume  
adjustment button on the LCD monitor section  
of the camera recorder.  
ꢀ
When [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Format]ꢀ-ꢀSystem is set to “HD+SD” or “HD  
+Web”, only SD or web files can be played back  
from slot B.  
ꢀ
In this case, files up-converted into the HD size  
are played back in the simple mode.  
86  
ꢂ
Deleting Clips  
Delete clip.  
Select [Delete Clips]ꢀ-ꢀ[This Clip] and press  
the Set button (R).  
A screen to confirm deletion appears.  
MENU/THUMB  
3
CANCEL  
.
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
ꢃ
Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
Deleting starts.  
OIS / 2  
LOLUX / 3  
CANCEL  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be  
4
deleted on the camera recorder.  
ꢀ
Read-only clips can be deleted on a PC.  
Deleting One Clip  
Delete the clip (one clip) pointed by the cursor in  
[Delete Clips]ꢀ-ꢀ[This Clip] in the menu.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Clips with OK mark cannot be deleted.  
During Thumbnail Screen  
ꢀ
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted.  
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted using  
the cross-shaped button (JKHꢀI).  
.
Selecting and Deleting Multiple Clips  
To select and delete multiple clips, refer to  
“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple  
Clips] P 89”.  
1
Deleting All Clips  
Delete all clips that are displayed.  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢂ
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.  
.
The action selection screen is displayed.  
ꢁ
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.  
The action selection screen is displayed.  
Select [Delete Clips]ꢀ-ꢀ[All Clips].  
A screen to confirm deletion appears.  
Select [Delete] and press the Set button  
(R).  
Deleting starts.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The time taken to delete clips depends on the  
number of clips to be deleted.  
87  
During Playback or Pause Screen  
Appending/Deleting OK  
Mark  
ꢀ
Press [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button during clip  
playback.  
ꢀ
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK  
mark will be appended.  
ꢀ
You can append OK marks to the clips for  
ꢀ
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the  
OK mark will be deleted.  
important scenes.  
ꢀ
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be  
deleted, thus protecting the important clips.  
ꢀ
When the camera recorder is in Media mode,  
you can delete the OK marks appended during  
recording, or append/delete OK marks after  
shooting.  
1000/2000  
00:00:00.00  
282min  
1920x1080  
60i HQ  
Jan 24,2012  
12:34:56  
MENU/THUMB  
4030 20 10  
0
CANCEL  
OK Mark  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
.
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
LOLUX / 3  
Memo :  
CANCEL  
ꢀ
The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended  
or deleted during playback.  
.
During Thumbnail Screen  
Appending/Deleting OK Mark of  
Multiple Clips  
To select and append/delete OK mark for multiple  
clips, refer to “[Selecting and Performing  
Operations on Multiple Clips] P 89”.  
ꢀ
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.  
ꢀ
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK  
mark will be appended.  
ꢀ
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the  
OK mark will be deleted.  
OK Mark  
.
88  
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively  
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.  
Select “Select Range” in the action  
selection screen, and press the Set button  
(R).  
Selecting and Performing  
Operations on Multiple  
Clips  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢀ
Multiple clips can be selected during thumbnail  
screen or playback screen display.  
ꢀ
After selecting multiple clips, perform  
appending/deleting of OK mark, deleting of clips  
using the action selection screen.  
2
ꢀ
After selecting multiple clips, the selections will  
be canceled by the following operations.  
ꢀ
When [Deselect All] in the action menu is  
selected  
ꢀ
.
When exiting Media mode from the thumbnail  
screen  
ꢂ
Move the cursor to the beginning (or end)  
of the range for multiple selection, and  
press the Set button (R).  
ꢀ
When removing the SD card  
ꢀ
When switching the slot in use  
ꢃ
Move the cursor to the other end of the  
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly  
range.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Magenta check marks appear on the clips  
within the range. (Including clips that were  
already selected.)  
ꢀ
Move the cursor to a clip without check  
mark and press the [OIS/2] button.  
A green check mark appears on the clip.  
Gray check marks appear on selected clips  
that are outside the range.  
1
3
4
.
ꢁ
Repeat Step 1 to select multiple clips.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Multiple clips can be selected.  
Press the [LOLUX/3] button while the  
multiple clips are selected.  
ꢀ
Appends OK mark together:  
[Add OK Mark]ꢀ-ꢀ[Selected Clips]  
ꢀ
Deletes OK mark together:  
[Delete OK Mark]ꢀ-ꢀ[Selected Clips]  
UploadingselectedclipstotheFTPserver  
ꢀ
.
together:  
[FTP Upload]ꢀ-ꢀ[Selected Clips]  
ꢀ
Deletes selected clips together:  
[Delete Clips]ꢀ-ꢀ[Selected Clips]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Selecting clips appended with check mark and  
pressing the [OIS/2] button will cancel the  
selection.  
ꢀ
If the operation is performed on multiple clips at  
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can  
stoptheoperation bypressingtheSetbutton(R)  
while the operation is in progress. However, it is  
not possible to undo operations that are  
completed.  
89  
ꢄ
Press the Set button (R) to confirm the  
range.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The check marks change from magenta to  
green.  
Pressing the [LOLUX/3] button while the  
multiple clips are selected displays the  
action selection screen. The following  
operations can be performed.  
ꢀ
Appends OK mark together:  
[Add OK Mark]ꢀ-ꢀ[Selected Clips]  
ꢀ
Deletes OK mark together:  
[Delete OK Mark]ꢀ-ꢀ[Selected Clips]  
ꢀ
UploadingselectedclipstotheFTPserver  
together:  
[FTP Upload]ꢀ-ꢀ[Selected Clips]  
ꢀ
Deletes selected clips together:  
[Delete Clips]ꢀ-ꢀ[Selected Clips]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Selecting clips appended with check mark and  
pressing the [OIS/2] button will cancel the  
selection.  
ꢀ
If the operation is performed on multiple clips at  
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can  
stoptheoperation bypressingtheSetbutton(R)  
while the operation is in progress. However, it is  
not possible to undo operations that are  
completed.  
90  
A
[MENU/THUMB] Button  
Basic Operations in Menu  
Screen  
ꢀ
Displays the menu screen. The [Main  
Menu] screen is displayed by default.  
During normal usage, [Main Menu] is  
displayed if the previous menu operation  
ended at [Main Menu], and [Favorites  
Menu] if the previous menu operation ended  
at [Favorites Menu].  
Press this button to close the menu screen  
during menu display and return to the normal  
screen.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button on the side  
control panel of the camera recorder or on the  
LCD monitor to display the menu screen on the  
LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Various settings for shooting and playback can  
be configured on the menu screen.  
ꢀ
There are two types of menu screens - [Main  
Menu] and [Favorites Menu].  
B
[CANCEL] Button  
ꢀ
[Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the  
camera recorder, classified according to  
functions and uses, while [Favorites Menu]  
allows users to customize the menu items freely.  
(' P117 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used  
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )  
Cancels settings and returns to the previous  
screen.  
C
D
Set Button (R)  
Sets the values and items.  
Cross-shaped Button (JKHꢀI)  
J
:
:
:
:
Moves the cursor upward.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The operating procedures and main screen  
displays are the same for both menus.  
The menu screen can also be displayed on  
external monitors connected to the video signal  
output terminal.  
K
H
I
Moves the cursor downward.  
Moves back to the previous item.  
Moves forward to the next item.  
E
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button  
(' P106 [ Display On TV ] )  
Adds the selected menu or submenu item to the  
[Favorites Menu].  
Operation Buttons  
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel  
of the camera recorder or the buttons on the LCD  
monitor to operate the menu.  
(' P117 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used  
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )  
F
G
[OIS/2] Button  
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or [UB  
Preset] setting screen. This button is disabled  
in other screens.  
A
MENU/THUMB  
DISPLAY  
D
[DISPLAY] Button  
Switches between the [Main Menu] and  
[Favorites Menu] screens.  
G
B
CANCEL  
C
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
A
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
OIS / 2  
D
B
TIME CODE  
CANCEL  
E
F
C
.
91  
Changing Setting Values  
Display and Description of the Menu  
Screen  
F
E
D
Selecting Menu Items  
A
I
H
C
A
B
G
B
F
E
.
A
Menu Item to Change  
C
D
Menu item to be changed.  
A list of setting values F appears in a pop-up.  
.
B
C
Operation Guide  
A
B
Cursor  
Guide for the current operation buttons.  
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-  
Setting Values Before Change  
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor  
Setting values before changing. The  
background of the item is displayed in blue.  
Menu Item  
ꢀ
Displays the names of the menu item and  
sub-menu.  
D
E
Scroll Bar  
Indicates the scroll position.  
ꢀ
Menu items with [...] after them indicates that  
there is a sub-menu to access.  
Cursor  
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-  
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor  
C
Fixed Item  
Items that cannot be changed are displayed in  
gray and cannot be selected.  
F
List of Setting Values  
ꢀ
A pop-up displaying a list of setting values for  
selection.  
D
E
Operation Guide  
Guide for the current operation buttons.  
ꢀ
The height of the pop-up depends on the  
number of settings available. Use the scroll  
bar D to confirm the current display status.  
Setting Value  
Setting values for the menu items.  
For menus with sub-menus, values are not  
displayed.  
F
G
Scroll Bar  
Indicates the scroll position.  
Header  
Indicates the current menu type with the line  
color.  
Blue  
Green  
:
:
[Main Menu] Screen  
[Favorites Menu] (Operation  
screen)  
Magenta  
:
[FavoritesMenu](Editingscreen)  
H
Remaining Battery Power  
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold  
separately) is not used, the battery mark which  
indicates the battery level may not appear.  
I
Menu Title  
Title of the currently displayed menu.  
92  
Text Input with Software Keyboard  
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Scene  
File]/[Picture File] subname, [Clip Name Prefix],  
and the settings under [Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings].  
A
B
Character Entry Field  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Field for entering the title.  
You can enter up to 8 characters for the  
[Scene File]/[Picture File] subname or up to  
4 characters for the [Clip Name Prefix].  
Character Cursor  
[Scene File]/[Picture File]  
Select a character using the key cursor D, and  
press the Set button (R) to input the selected  
character at the position of the character cursor.  
The character cursor moves to the next position  
on the right each time a character is input.  
The cursor can be moved using the arrow keys  
H.  
(' P130 [Configuring Setup Files] )  
A
B
H
C
D
E
Character Keys  
C
Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to move  
the key cursor D to the character you want to  
enter.  
G
F
D
E
Key Cursor  
.
Indicates the currently selected character or  
item. Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to  
move the cursor.  
[Clip Name Prefix]  
Confirmation Buttons  
(' P114 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )  
ꢀ
Select [Set]/[Store] and press the Set button  
(R) to confirm the title.  
A
B
ꢀ
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R)  
on the side control panel of the camera  
recorder to abort character input and return  
to the previous screen.  
H
E
C
F
G
[SP] Space Key  
Select [SP] and press the Set button (R) on the  
side control panel of the camera recorder to  
enter a space at the current position of the  
character cursor B.  
D
.
[7ꢀ] Backspace Key  
Settings under [Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]  
Select [7ꢀ] and press the Set button (R) on the  
side control panel of the camera recorder to  
delete the character on the left of the character  
cursor B.  
The keyboard displayed varies according to the  
settings.  
(' P115 [Settings Item] )  
H
I
Arrow Keys  
A
Moves the position of the character cursor B.  
Character Switch Button  
Switches the character buttons C to the upper  
case, lower case, and symbols.  
H
G
B
C
I
F
E
D
.
93  
Menu Screen Hierarchical  
Chart  
TC/UB...  
TC Generator  
Main Menu...  
Camera Function...  
TC Preset  
UB Preset  
Drop Frame  
Bars  
OIS  
Flicker Correction  
Flash Band Correction  
Shutter  
LCD/VF...  
Shooting Assist...  
Marker Settings...  
Display Settings...  
LCD + VF  
AE Level  
AE Speed  
ALC Limit  
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)  
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)  
EEI Limit  
VF Color  
VF Bright  
VF Contrast  
Smooth Trans  
GAIN L  
LCD Contrast  
LCD Backlight  
LCD Mirror  
GAIN M  
GAIN H  
AE LEVEL SW  
Handle Zoom Speed  
User Switch Set...  
A/V Set...  
Video Set...  
Audio Set...  
Camera Process...  
System...  
Detail  
Adjust...  
Adjust...  
Record Set...  
Media...  
Master Black  
Black Toe  
Knee  
Setup File...  
Auto Power Off  
Tally Lamp  
GPS  
White Clip  
Gamma  
WDR  
Network  
White Balance...  
Color Matrix  
Color Gain  
Reset All  
Date/Time  
Time Zone  
System Information  
Reverse Picture  
Reset Process  
.
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
Some menus cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These  
items are displayed in gray, and they cannot be selected.  
ꢀ
Setting value with the R mark is the factory default.  
94  
Caution :  
Camera Function Menu  
ꢀ
Flash band correction function is not available in  
any of the following cases.  
Menu screen for specifying operation settings  
ꢀ
When [Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”  
during shooting.  
ꢀ
When [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]/[3Frame & Bit  
This item can only be selected in the Camera  
mode.  
Rate] is set to “24p(HQ)” or “24p(UHQ)”  
ꢀ
When in the Automatic Shutter mode or when  
the shutter is turned on in the Manual Shutter  
Bars  
mode  
For setting whether to output color bars.  
(' P54 [Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
Switching)] )  
ꢀ
Memo :  
When [Network] is set to “On(SDI Off)” or  
“On(HDMI Off)”  
ꢀ
The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output  
simultaneously with the color bar output.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
[Flash Band Correction] operates when the  
luminance of the screen varies widely, with or  
without flash light. However, depending on the  
shooting condition, the flash band correction  
may not be fully effective even if there are flash  
lights.  
(' P108 [ Test Tone ] )  
OIS  
For setting whether to enable image stabilizer.  
When “On” is selected, set the Level.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
The following symptoms may occur under flash  
light, but these are not malfunctions due to flash  
band correction.  
ꢀ
Level  
ꢀ
Moving object appears to be stationary  
For setting the level of the image stabilizer.  
momentarily.  
[Setting Values: High, RNormal]  
ꢀ
A horizontal line appears on the images.  
The [Flash Band Correction] function will be set  
to “Off” if the camera recorder switches from the  
Camera mode to another mode, or when the  
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set to  
“OFF(CHG)”.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When “High” is selected, correcting severe  
camera shake may cause the area surrounding  
the image to darken.  
Flicker Correction  
Shutter  
For setting whether to adjust image flicker that  
occurs under a fluorescent light.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
For specifying shutter-related settings.  
Use this item to set to “Step” (fixed value) or  
“Variable” when operating with the cross-shaped  
button (JK) on the right side.  
Flash Band Correction  
ꢀ
Variable:  
For reducing the condition of the flash band  
phenomenon, which creates an unnatural image  
with a part of it brightly lit, such as by the camera  
flash of another still camera.  
Sets to variable scan. Use this setting such as  
when shooting a PC monitor.  
Step:  
ꢀ
Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter  
speed by a fixed value.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
[Setting Values: Variable, RStep]  
AE Level  
For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto  
Exposure).  
This can also be adjusted using the cross-shaped  
button (HI) on the right side.  
[Setting Values: -6 to +6 (R0)]  
AE Speed  
ForsettingtheconvergencespeedduringAE(Auto  
Exposure).  
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]  
95  
ALC Limit  
AE LEVEL SW  
For setting the maximum gain value of “ALC”,  
which electrically boosts the sensitivity level  
according to the brightness automatically.  
[Setting Values: 24dB, R18dB, 12dB, 6dB]  
For specifying the operation of the cross-shaped  
button (HI) on the right side.  
ꢀ
AE LEVEL/VFR:  
Sets the number of frames during Variable  
Frame Rec, and operates as the AE level setting  
button in other cases.  
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)  
(' P81 [Variable Frame Rec] )  
AE Level:  
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when  
auto iris is enabled.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Operates as the AE level setting button at all  
times.  
[Setting Values: F5.6, F4, F2.8, F2, RF1.6]  
Disable:  
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)  
Disables the button.  
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when  
auto iris is enabled.  
[Setting Values: AE LEVEL/VFR, RAE Level,  
Disable]  
[Setting Values: F11, RF8, F5.6]  
Handle Zoom Speed  
EEI Limit  
This function allows you to set the zoom speed of  
the zoom lever at the handle when the [ZOOM FIX/  
VAR/OFF] switch is set to “FIX”.  
For setting the shutter speed control range when  
EEI is enabled.  
[Setting Values: 4F-stop, R3F-stop, 2F-stop]  
[Setting Values: 1 to 8 (R 5)]  
Smooth Trans  
User Switch Set...  
For setting the shock reduction function, which  
slows down the sudden change when switching  
with the [GAIN] or [WHT BAL] selection switch.  
[Setting Values: Fast, Middle, Slow, ROff]  
For specifying user button related settings.  
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
However, this function is disabled when the  
[FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”, or when  
switching the gain selection switch that was set  
to “ALC”.  
GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H  
For setting the gain value of each position on the  
[GAIN] selection switch.  
Thisisfixedat“ALC”whenthe[FULLAUTO]switch  
is set to “ON”.  
[Setting Values: 24dB, 21dB, 18dB, 15dB, 12dB,  
9dB, 6dB, 3dB, 0dB, -3dB, -6dB]  
(Default values GAIN L: -6dB, GAIN M: 0dB, GAIN  
H: 9dB)  
96  
User Switch Set Item  
Spot Meter  
For specifying the operation when any of the  
[USER1]-[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],  
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Spot  
Meter”.  
USER1 - USER7, LCD KEY▲/LCD KEY▶/LCD  
KEY▼/LCD KEY◀  
By assigning one of the following functions to each  
of the [FOCUS ASSIST/1], [OIS/2], [LOLUX/3], [AE  
LOCK/4], [ZEBRA/5], [MARKER/6], [C.REVIEW/7]  
buttons or the cross-shaped buttons on the LCD  
monitor, these buttons can be used to control the  
assigned function (on/off, start, switch).  
(' P68 [Setting Spot Meter] )  
ꢀ
Max & Min:  
Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the  
image.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Max:  
Displays the brightest area of the image.  
Set according to the shooting conditions. Usable  
only in the Camera mode.  
Min:  
Displays the darkest area of the image.  
[Setting Values: None, Zebra, Marker, Bars, Focus  
Assist, OIS, Flash Band, LCD Backlight, Lolux, AE  
Lock, Spot Meter, Face Detect, OK Mark, Clip  
Cutter Trig, Backup Trig, Clip Review, Load Picture  
File, White Balance, Preset Zoom1, Preset Zoom2,  
Preset Zoom3]  
Manual:  
Displays the image brightness at a specified  
position.  
[Setting Values: RMax & Min, Max, Min, Manual]  
Face Detect  
Lolux  
For specifying the operation when any of the  
[USER1]-[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],  
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Face  
Detect”.  
To increase the sensitivity when in dim  
surroundings, set a value in the Lolux mode.  
[Setting Values: 36dB, R30dB]  
Select the control to track results of face detection.  
Clip Review  
ꢀ
AF&AE:  
Sets auto focus and exposure control for the  
face that is being tracked.  
For specifying the operation when any of the  
[USER1]-[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],  
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip  
Review”.  
ꢀ
AF:  
Sets auto focus for the face that is being tracked.  
[Setting Values: RAF&AE, AF]  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Last 5sec:  
Memo :  
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the  
ꢀ
When “AF” is specified, this function will be  
activated only when the [FOCUS] switch is set  
to “Auto”.  
ending.  
Top 5sec:  
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the  
beginning.  
When “AF&AE” is specified, this function will be  
activated only when the [FOCUS] switch is set  
to “Auto”, or when one or more of the items  
(Gain, Iris and Shutter) is set to Auto mode.  
Clip:  
Views the entire clip.  
[Setting Values: RLast 5sec, Top 5sec, Clip]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
This item is selectable when any of the [USER1]-  
[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD  
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip  
Review”.  
ꢀ
Sensitivity  
For setting the level of ease of face detection.  
[Setting Values: Low, Middle, RHigh]  
97  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Hysteresis  
Adjust...  
For setting the margin to maintain status when the  
For specifying the detailed settings of the contour  
face that is being tracked is lost.  
(detail).  
Set to “Fast” to select another object immediately  
if the face on the screen is lost.  
(' P100 [Detail/Adjust Item] )  
Memo :  
Set to “Slow” to operate at the same position for  
some time even if the face on the screen is lost.  
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]  
ꢀ
This item cannot be selected when [Detail] is set  
to “Off”.  
Master Black  
AE Lock  
For adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that  
serves as the reference black.  
For specifying the operation when any of the  
[USER1]-[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],  
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “AE  
Lock”.  
Increasing the value increases the pedestal.  
[Setting Values: -50 to +50 (R0)]  
ꢀ
AE:  
Black Toe  
Use this feature to fix a value to the Auto function  
of Gain, Iris, or Shutter when the user button that  
is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed.  
AE/WB:  
Process the dark areas according to the balance of  
bright and dark areas in the image to adjust the  
overall balance of contrast.  
ꢀ
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item  
according to the condition of the captured video  
signals.  
Use this feature to fix a value to White Balance  
and the Auto function of Gain, Iris, or Shutter  
when the user button that is assigned “AE Lock”  
is pressed.  
ꢀ
Stretch:  
Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to  
stretch the signals of these areas only, thereby  
showing the contrast between bright and dark  
areas more clearly.  
[Setting Values: RAE, AE/WB]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
This feature only works when Iris, Shutter or  
Gain is set to Auto mode.  
Specify the amount of stretch with [Stretch  
Level].  
ꢀ
“AE Lock” is canceled when the button assigned  
with “AE Lock” is pressed, or when any of the  
functions that can be locked is operated  
regardless of Manual/Auto mode.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Normal:  
Normal condition.  
Compress:  
Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase  
the contrast when the entire image appears  
bright and contrast is weak. Specify the  
compression amount with [Compress Level].  
Preset Zoom Speed  
For setting the speed to shift to the preset zoom  
position that is assigned to a user button.  
[Setting Values: 1 to 127 (R 64)]  
[Setting Values: Stretch, RNormal, Compress]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item  
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.  
Camera Process Menu  
ꢀ
Stretch Level  
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera  
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is  
images.  
specified.  
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode.  
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Detail  
This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is  
set to “Stretch”. Otherwise, this item appears as  
“---” and cannot be selected.  
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement  
level.  
Increasing the value increases the sharpness of  
the contour.  
[Setting Values: -10 to +10, Off (R0)]  
98  
ꢀ
Compress Level  
White Clip  
Compression amount increases when a larger  
For setting the point to apply white clip for input  
video signals with a high luminance level.  
value is specified.  
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
108%:  
Applies white clip at the point where the  
luminance level is 108 %.  
ꢀ
This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is  
set to “Compress”. Otherwise, this item appears  
as “---” and cannot be selected.  
ꢀ
100%:  
Applies white clip at the point where the  
luminance level is 100 %. Even when this item  
is set to “108%”, it switches automatically to  
“100%” if the screen appears too white. Set to  
this value when the system in use limits Y output  
signals within 100 %.  
Knee  
For specifying the “Knee” operation, which  
compresses video signals beyond a certain level to  
show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To  
check the gradation of a bright area, set to“Manual”  
and adjust the knee point (starting point of knee  
operation) manually.  
[Setting Values: R108%, 100%]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item  
appears as “108%” and cannot be selected.  
ꢀ
Manual:  
Enables manual adjustment of knee point using  
Gamma  
[Level].  
Auto:  
For adjusting the gamma curve that determines the  
gradation expression.  
ꢀ
Adjusts the knee point automatically according  
to the luminance level.  
ꢀ
Cinema:  
Sets to a gamma curve with similar gradation to  
the screen characteristics of movies.  
Standard:  
[Setting Values: Manual, RAuto]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item  
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.  
Sets to a standard gamma curve.  
[Setting Values: Cinema, RStandard]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Level  
ꢀ
When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item  
For setting the starting point (knee point) of knee  
compression when [Knee] is set to “Manual”.  
[Setting Values: R100%, 95%, 90%, 85%]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.  
ꢀ
Gamma Level  
This item can be specified separately when  
When [Knee] is set to other than “Auto”, or  
[WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item  
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.  
[Gamma] is set to “Standard” or “Cinema”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Increase the number:  
Enhances the gradation of black. However, the  
gradation of bright areas deteriorates.  
Decrease the number:  
ꢀ
Sensitivity  
Enhances the gradation of bright areas.  
However, the gradation of black deteriorates.  
For setting the response speed of the “Knee”  
operation when [Knee] is set to “Auto”.  
Set to “Slow” when shooting an object under a  
condition where there is drastic change in the light  
intensity.  
[Setting Values: -5 to +5 (R 0)]  
WDR  
For setting the WDR (Wide Dynamic Range)  
function.  
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When shooting object with wide dynamic range  
due to backlight conditions, this function  
compresses the dynamic range while maintaining  
image contrast through providing gradation  
compensation to the input video signals.  
When [Knee] is set to “Manual”, or [WDR] is set  
to other than “Off”, this item appears as “---” and  
cannot be selected.  
99  
ꢀ
Strong:  
Color Gain  
Enhances the effect of gradation compensation  
for object with wide dynamic range due to  
outdoor or strong backlight conditions.  
Natural:  
For adjusting the video signal color level.  
Increasing the value deepens the color.  
[Setting Values: -50 to +15, Off (R0)]  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Normal setting for wide dynamic range.  
Weak:  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Images are displayed in black-and-white when  
Reduces the effect of gradation compensation  
compared to the normal setting.  
Off:  
this is set to “Off”.  
ꢀ
Reverse Picture  
Sets the wide dynamic range function to “Off”.  
[Setting Values: Strong, Natural, Weak, ROff]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
For recording images correctly by setting this item  
to “Rotate” when the lens image appears upside  
down or laterally inverted.  
When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, [Black  
Toe], [Knee], [Gamma] and [White Clip] cannot  
be selected.  
ꢀ
Rotate:  
Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the  
image.  
ꢀ
Off:  
White Balance...  
Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the  
image.  
Menu for adjusting white balance.  
[Setting Values: Rotate, ROff]  
(' P101 [White Balance Item] )  
* For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White  
Reset Process  
Balance] P 56”.  
Restores all items in the [Camera Process] menu  
to their default settings.  
Color Matrix  
ꢀ
For setting the color matrix.  
Detail/Adjust Item  
V/H Balance  
ꢀ
Cinema Subdued:  
Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to  
the screen characteristics of movies.  
Cinema Vivid:  
ꢀ
For setting the H/V balance to enhance contour  
(detail) in the horizontal (H) or vertical (V) direction.  
Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the  
screen characteristics of movies.  
Standard:  
ꢀ
H+1 to H+4:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Increasing the value enhances contour in the  
horizontal direction.  
Sets to a standard color matrix.  
Off:  
ꢀ
V+1 to V+4:  
Sets the color matrix function to Off.  
Increasing the value enhances contour in the  
vertical direction.  
[Setting Values: Cinema Subdued, Cinema Vivid,  
RStandard, Off]  
[Setting Values: H+1 to H+4, RNormal, V+1 to V+4]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Adjust  
ꢀ
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to  
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Normal”.  
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to  
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD  
recording, but will be fixed at “Normal” during SD  
recording.  
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color  
according to the user’s preference.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a  
color according to the user’s preference.  
The saturation, hue and brightness of the  
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in  
total) can be set individually.  
ꢀ
The adjusted values of “Standard”, “Cinema  
Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color Matrix]  
can be stored individually.  
H Frequency  
For specifying the correction frequency of the  
horizontal contour. Set this according to the object.  
(' P129 [Adjusting Color Matrix] )  
ꢀ
High:  
[Setting range for Lightness/Saturation: -10 to +10]  
(roughly ± 10 %)  
Emphasizes the high frequency range. Use this  
when shooting objects with fine patterns.  
Middle:  
[Setting range for Hue: -5 to +5] (roughly ± 5°)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Memo :  
ꢀ
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.  
Low:  
This item cannot be selected when [Color  
Matrix] is set to “Off”.  
Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this  
when shooting objects with large patterns.  
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]  
100  
White Balance Item  
Preset Temp.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to  
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Low”.  
ꢀ
For setting the color temperature when the [WHT  
BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”.  
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White  
Balance] P 56”.  
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to  
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD  
recording, but will be fixed at “Low” during SD  
recording.  
Alternative Temp.  
V Frequency  
For setting the alternative color temperature in the  
Preset mode.  
For specifying the correction frequency of the  
vertical contour. Set this according to the object.  
When the [WHT BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”,  
pressing the [,] button each time switches the  
color temperature setting in the Preset mode.  
([Preset Temp.]ꢀ)ꢀ[Alternative Temp.])  
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White  
Balance] P 56”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Low:  
Emphasizes the low frequency range.  
Middle:  
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.  
High:  
Emphasizes the high frequency range.  
[Setting Values: Low, RMiddle, High]  
AWB Paint  
Memo :  
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component in the  
AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.  
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White  
Balance] P 56”.  
ꢀ
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to  
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Low”.  
(' P111 [ Record Format ] )  
ꢀ
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to  
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD  
recording, but will be fixed at “Low” during SD  
recording.  
ꢀ
Increase the number:  
Strengthens the red/blue.  
Decrease the number:  
Weakens the red/blue.  
ꢀ
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]  
ꢀ
“High” cannot be selected under the following  
settings.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [ꢂResolution] is set to “1920x1080”,  
ꢀ
This item is selectable when the [WHT BAL]  
switch on the right of the camera recorder is set  
to “A” or “B”. When “PRESET” is set, this item  
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.  
Different values can be specified for “A” and “B”.  
After the [,] (Auto White Balance) button is  
pressed to readjust the white balance while  
[Clear Paint After AWB] is set to “On”, R and B  
values switch automatically to “0”.  
and [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i(HQ)”  
or “50i(HQ)”.  
ꢀ
When [ꢂResolution] is set to “1440x1080”,  
and [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i(HQ)”,  
ꢀ
ꢀ
“50i(HQ)”, “60i(SP)” or “50i(SP)”.  
Skin Detail  
For turning On/Off the Skin Detail function, which  
is used to adjust the contour correction effect of the  
colors captured.  
Select “On” to soften the detail at areas where skin  
tone is detected.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
ꢀ
Level  
For setting the level of contour correction (degree  
of softening) using the Skin Detail function.  
Decreasing the value increases the level of contour  
correction (degree of softening).  
[Setting Values: -1, R -2, -3]  
ꢀ
Range  
For adjusting the range of skin tone to trigger the  
Skin Detail function.  
Increasing the value increases the range.  
[Setting Values: -5 to +5 (R0)]  
101  
ꢀ
Regen:  
Clear Paint After AWB  
The time code operates in the run mode during  
recording. When the SD card is replaced, the  
last time code recorded on the card is read and  
recorded on a new card so that the time code  
continues in running order.  
For specifying whether to clear the [AWB Paint] (R  
value and B value) settings after executing AWB  
(Auto White Balance).  
ꢀ
On:  
Sets the [AWB Paint] (R value and B value)  
settings to “0” after executing AWB (Auto White  
Balance).  
[Setting Values: Free Run(Ext), Free Run, RRec  
Run, Regen]  
TC Preset  
ꢀ
Off:  
Does not change the [AWB Paint] (R value and  
B value) settings after executing AWB (Auto  
White Balance).  
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second,  
frame).  
Display  
:
:
Drop setting 02:02:25.20  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20  
FAW Paint  
UB Preset  
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component  
during FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode.  
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)  
Display AB CD EF 01  
:
ꢀ
Increase the number:  
Strengthens the red/blue.  
Decrease the number:  
Weakens the red/blue.  
Drop Frame  
ꢀ
For setting the framing mode of the time code  
generator.  
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]  
ꢀ
Non Drop:  
Internal time code generator works in the non-  
drop-frame mode. Use this setting when placing  
emphasis on the number of frames.  
Drop:  
TC/UB Menu  
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.  
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode,  
or during recording.  
ꢀ
Internal time code generator works in the drop-  
frame mode. Use this setting when placing  
emphasis on the recording time.  
[Setting Values: Non Drop, RDrop]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
TC Generator  
This item can be set only when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[ꢂFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “60p”, “30p”, or  
“60i”. When the frame rate is “24p”, “Non Drop”  
becomes fixed and cannot be selected. When  
the frame rate is “50p”, “25p”, or “50i”, this item  
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
For setting the operation of the time code.  
ꢀ
Free Run(Ext):  
External time code input will be synchronized  
with this and the time code will be recorded.  
Free Run:  
ꢀ
The time code operates in the run mode at all  
times regardless of the recording status. It  
continues to run even when the power of the  
camera recorder is turned off.  
ꢀ
Rec Run:  
The time code operates in the run mode during  
recording. It continues to run in the order of the  
recorded clips as long as the SD card is not  
replaced. If the SD card is removed and  
recording is made on another card, time code  
will be recorded on the new card from where it  
was left off in the previous card.  
102  
VF Bright  
LCD/VF Menu  
For setting the brightness of the viewfinder screen.  
Increasing the value increases the brightness.  
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]  
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD  
monitor or viewfinder screen.  
This menu screen can be used to specify settings  
related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern  
display, screen size, marker, and safety zone. In  
addition, it is also used for selecting whether to  
display characters on the LCD monitor or  
viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the  
picture quality of the LCD monitor.  
VF Contrast  
For setting the difference in luminance between the  
darkest and brightness areas in the viewfinder  
screen.  
Increasing the value increases the contrast.  
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]  
Shooting Assist...  
LCD Contrast  
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function.  
For setting the difference in luminance between the  
darkest and brightness areas in the LCD monitor.  
Increasing the value increases the contrast.  
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]  
(' P103 [Shooting Assist Item] )  
Marker Settings...  
For setting items such as the safety zone and  
center mark.  
LCD Backlight  
(' P104 [Marker Settings Item] )  
For setting the brightness of the LCD monitor  
backlight.  
Display Settings...  
[Setting Values: Bright, RNormal]  
For specifying display-related settings.  
LCD Mirror  
(' P105 [Display Settings Item] )  
For specifying the image display method when  
facing the LCD monitor.  
LCD + VF  
Select “Mirror” to display the image after laterally  
inverting it. (Mirror display)  
For selecting a method to switch between the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder screen displays.  
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and  
Viewfinder] )  
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and  
Viewfinder] )  
[Setting Values: Mirror, RNormal]  
ꢀ
On:  
Displays images on the viewfinder at all times.  
Off:  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The setting of this item is valid only in Camera  
Turns off the viewfinder screen display when the  
LCD monitor is turned on.  
mode.  
ꢀ
During color bar, menu screen and status  
screen display, the “Mirror” setting is disabled.  
(' P128 [Color Bar Output] )  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
VF Color  
ꢀ
For selecting whether to display the image on the  
viewfinder screen in color or black-and-white.  
Select “On” to display in color, and “Off” to display  
in black-and-white.  
Shooting Assist Item  
Focus Assist  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
Memo :  
For setting whether to add color to the contour of  
the focused image upon switching the image to  
black-and-white.  
ꢀ
The setting of this item is valid only in Camera  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
mode.  
ꢀ
When this item is set to “Off”, only the captured  
images are displayed in black-and-white. The  
display and menu screens are displayed in  
color.  
ꢀ
When [Network] is set to “On”, this item is fixed  
at “Off” and cannot be selected.  
103  
ꢀ
Marker Settings Item  
Type  
For specifying the operation when the [FOCUS  
For setting the marker and safety zone, which are  
useful in helping you determine the angle of view  
for the image according to the shooting purpose.  
(' P128 [Marker and Safety Zone Displays  
(Camera Mode Only)] )  
ASSIST/1] button is pressed.  
(' P49 [Focus Assist Function] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ACCU-Focus:  
Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU-Focus  
(forced focus) functions. The depth of field of the  
object becomes shallower to enable easier  
focusing. The ACCU-Focus function switches  
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.  
Normal:  
Memo :  
ꢀ
During Clip Review or when in the Media mode,  
the markers do not appear regardless of the  
setting.  
Enables only the Focus Assist function. The  
focused area is displayed in color to enable  
easier focusing. Display color can be specified  
with [Color].  
Marker Settings  
For setting whether to display marker, safety zone,  
and center marks on the screen.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
[Setting Values: ACCU-Focus, RNormal]  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Aspect Ratio  
Color  
For selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used  
For setting the display color of the focused area  
from the overall angle of view.  
when Focus Assist is activated.  
[Setting Values: 16:9(+4:3), 2.35:1, 1.85:1, R16:9,  
1.75:1, 1.66:1, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3, 2.35:1 Center,  
2.35:1 Top, 1.85:1 Center, 1.85:1 Top]  
[Setting Values: RBlue, Green, Red]  
Zebra  
Memo :  
For selecting whether to display zebra patterns at  
the bright areas of the subject.  
Select “On” to display zebra patterns or “Off” to  
hide.  
ꢀ
When [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item  
is fixed at “4:3” and cannot be selected.  
(' P112 [ SD Aspect ] )  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
ꢀ
Top  
ꢀ
Aspect Marker  
For setting the maximum luminance level for the  
For specifying how boundary markers are to be  
used to indicate the parts of an image that are  
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in  
[Aspect Ratio].  
zebra pattern display.  
[Setting Values: Over, 100% to 5% (in 5%  
increments)] (R80%)  
ꢀ
Bottom  
ꢀ
Line+Halftone:  
Displays the boundary using lines, and areas  
outside the boundary in halftone.  
Halftone:  
For setting the minimum luminance level for the  
zebra pattern display.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
[Setting Values: 100% to 0% (in 5% increments)]  
(R70%)  
Displays areas outside the boundary in halftone.  
Line:  
Memo :  
Displays the boundary using lines.  
Off:  
ꢀ
The relation between Top and Bottom is such  
that Top>Bottom always holds. To maintain this  
relation when setting Top, the Bottom value is  
automatically corrected.  
Hides the boundary markers.  
[Setting Values: Line+Halftone, Halftone, Line,  
ROff]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to “16:9” or  
“16:9(+4:3)”, this item is fixed at “Off” and cannot  
be selected.  
104  
ꢀ
Safety Zone  
Media Remain  
For setting the percentage of area that is to be  
deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the  
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect  
Ratio].  
For setting whether to display the remaining space  
of the recording SD card.  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
Memo :  
[Setting Values: 95%, 93%, 90%, 88%, 80%, ROff]  
ꢀ
When the remaining space warning is  
displayed, the information appears even when  
“Off” is selected.  
ꢀ
Center Mark  
For specifying whether to display a mark to indicate  
the screen center within the aspect ratio selected  
in [Aspect Ratio].  
ꢀ
The displayed time is an estimate.  
TC/UB  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
ꢀ
For specifying whether to display the time code  
(TC) or user’s bit (UB) rate in the display on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder screen.  
Display Settings Item  
This menu is used to set the displays on the LCD  
[Setting Values: UB, RTC, Off]  
monitor and viewfinder screen.  
Audio Meter  
Zoom  
For specifying whether to display the audio level  
meter in the display on the LCD monitor and  
viewfinder screen.  
For setting the display method of the zoom  
position.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Number:  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
Displays the zoom position in numbers (0-99).  
Bar:  
Battery  
Displays the zoom position in a bar.  
Off:  
For setting the display of the remaining battery  
power in the display on the LCD monitor and  
viewfinder screen.  
Does not display the zoom position.  
[Setting Values: Number, RBar, Off]  
The battery information appears only on the  
Display 1 screen in Camera mode.  
(' P120 [Display 1 screen] )  
Focus  
For setting the display method of the focal length  
during manual focus.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Time:  
Displays the remaining battery power in  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Feet:  
minutes. (min)  
Displays the focus in feet.  
Capacity%:  
Meter:  
Displays the remaining battery power in  
Displays the focus in meters.  
percentage. (%)  
Off:  
Voltage:  
Does not display the focal length during focus.  
Displays the current battery voltage in units of  
[Setting Values: Feet, RMeter, Off]  
0.1 V. (V)  
[Off]:  
ND Filter  
The remaining battery power is not displayed.  
For setting whether to display the filter position.  
[Setting Values: RTime, Capacity%, Voltage, Off]  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The battery mark that appears before the “Time”,  
“Capacity%” or “Voltage” value changes  
Record Format  
For setting whether to display the video format  
during recording or playback.  
according to the remaining battery power.  
9 : 10 % and below  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
8 : 11 % to 30 %  
4 : 31% to 70 %  
) : 71 % to 100 %  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the remaining battery power is low, “RES”  
instead of the value is displayed.  
Replace the battery as soon as possible.  
The remaining battery power and remaining  
time are intended as reference values for the  
shooting duration.  
105  
Date/Time  
A/V Set Menu  
Menu screen for video output and audio.  
For specifying whether to display the date and time  
in the display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
screen.  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
Video Set...  
For specifying video output-related settings.  
Date Style  
(' P106 [Video Set Item] )  
For setting the date display sequence for display  
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen as well  
as for time stamp recording.  
Audio Set...  
For specifying audio-related settings.  
Display examples of the setting values are as  
follows.  
(' P107 [Audio Set Item] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
DMY2: 30 Jun 2012  
DMY1: 30-06-2012  
MDY2: Jun 30, 2012  
MDY1: 06-30-2012  
YMD: 2012-06-30  
Video Set Item  
Display On TV  
For setting whether to display the display and menu  
characters on the external monitor.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
[Setting Values: DMY2, DMY1, MDY1, MDY2,  
YMD]  
(Default values: MDY2 (U model), DMY1 (E  
model))  
HDMI/SDI Out  
Time Style  
For setting the terminal to output the video.  
[Setting Values: HDMI+SDI, SDI, HDMI, ROff]  
For setting the time display for display on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder screen as well as for time  
stamp recording.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Network] is set to “On(SDI Off)”, videos  
will not be output to SDI. Also, setting to  
“On(HDMI Off)” disables the HDMI output.  
The selectable options vary according to the  
[Network] setting.  
[Setting Values: 24hour, 12hour]  
(Default values: 12hour (U model), 24hour (E  
model))  
ꢀ
Shutter  
ꢀ
For setting the shutter display to be displayed on  
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.  
Resolution  
For selecting the resolution of video output from the  
[HDMI]/[SDI] terminal according to the monitor to  
be connected.  
ꢀ
DEG:  
Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the  
same way as film cameras.  
SEC:  
[Setting Values: 576i, 576p, 480i, 480p, 720p,  
R1080i]  
ꢀ
Displays the shutter speed in seconds.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
[Setting Values: DEG, RSEC]  
The selectable options vary according to the  
setting in [System]/[ꢂResolution]/[ꢂFrame &  
Bit Rate] of [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Format].  
Memo :  
ꢀ
“DEG” is selectable only when [ꢂFrame & Bit  
Rate] is set to “24p(HQ)” or “25p(HQ)”.  
When [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate] is set to other values,  
the shutter display setting is fixed at “SEC” and  
cannot be selected.  
ꢀ
Cross conversion output is not possible.  
ꢀ
HDMI Color  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
For setting the color format of HDMI signals.  
This item is selectable only when [HDMI/SDI  
Out] is set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.  
[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]  
106  
ꢀ
HDMI Enhance  
Input2 Mic Ref.  
ꢀ
For setting the color range of HDMI signals.  
When connecting to a PC monitor, set this to  
“On”.  
For setting the reference input level when the  
[INPUT2] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC  
+48V”.  
ꢀ
This item is selectable only when [HDMI/SDI  
Out] is set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.  
[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB, R-50dB, -44dB,  
-38dB]  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
Int. Mic Gain  
SD Aspect  
Forsettingthesensitivityofthebuilt-inmicrophone.  
For setting the style of displaying down-converted  
[Setting Values: +12dB, +6dB, R0dB]  
images on a 4:3 aspect ratio screen.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
AUX Gain  
Side Cut:  
Displays image with the left and right sides cut  
For setting the sensitivity of the [AUX] terminal  
input.  
off.  
Letter:  
[Setting Values: +12dB, +6dB, R0dB]  
Displays as a wide image with the top and  
bottom blackened.  
Ref. Level  
Squeeze:  
Displays image that is squeezed horizontally.  
For setting the audio reference level to be recorded  
to the SD card. (Applies to both [CH1/CH2].)  
[Setting Values: -12dB, -18dB, R-20dB]  
[Setting Values: Side Cut, Letter, RSqueeze]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Record Format]ꢀ ꢀ[System] is set to “SD”  
-
Limiter  
or “HD+SD”, and when [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”,  
this item appears as “---” and cannot be selected.  
(' P111 [ System ] )  
For setting the limiter operation.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Ref. Level:  
Sets “Ref. Level” to the maximum recording  
level.  
SD Set Up  
-8dBFS, -5dBFS:  
For selecting whether to add a setup signal to the  
video signal output from the [AV] output terminal.  
Setup signals are added when “7.5%” is selected.  
[Setting Values: 7.5%, 0.0%]  
Sets “-8dBFS” or “-5dBFS” to the maximum  
recording level.  
Off:  
Depending on the settings of the [CH1/CH2  
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switches, the  
operation may be different as described below.  
(Default values: 7.5% (U model), fixed at “0.0%” (E  
model))  
ꢀ
The limiter does not function when  
Memo :  
ꢀ
“MANUAL” is set.  
Depending on the menu settings of the camera  
recorder and the condition of the cable  
connected to it, the setup signal setting may be  
fixed at “0.0%”. “0.0%” is displayed in gray in this  
case.  
ꢀ
The limiter functions at -5 dBFS when  
“AUTO” is set.  
[SettingValues:Ref. Level, -8dBFS, R-5dBFS, Off]  
AGC Response  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Attack Time  
Audio Set Item  
Input1 Mic Ref.  
Sets the time to activate the limiter.  
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]  
ꢀ
Decay Time  
For setting the reference input level when the  
[INPUT1] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC  
+48V”.  
[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB, R-50dB, -44dB,  
-38dB]  
Sets the time to deactivate the limiter operation.  
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]  
107  
AGC Mode  
Test Tone  
For setting whether to link the limiter operation of  
[CH1] and [CH2].  
For specifying whether to output the audio test  
signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.  
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]  
INPUT1/2 Wind Cut  
Memo :  
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of  
theaudioinputsignals(low-cut)whenthe[INPUT1/  
INPUT2] switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V”.  
Set this item to reduce wind noise from the  
microphone.  
ꢀ
Enabled only when both the [AUX] input terminal  
and [INPUT1/INPUT2] input terminal are set to  
“LINE” or “MIC”, and CH1/CH2 of the [CH1/CH2  
AUTO/MANUAL] switch is set to “AUTO”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Both:  
XLR Manual Level  
Enables low-cut on both the [INPUT1] and  
[INPUT2] terminals.  
For setting whether to link manual audio  
adjustment operation between [INPUT1] and  
[INPUT2] terminals.  
INPUT2:  
Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT2]  
terminal only.  
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.  
When this item is set to “Link”, adjust the recording  
level using the [CH1] recording level adjustment  
knob.  
INPUT1:  
Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT1]  
terminal only.  
Off:  
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]  
Memo :  
Disables low-cut.  
[Setting Values: Both, INPUT2, INPUT1, ROff]  
ꢀ
Enabled only when both the [INPUT1/INPUT2]  
input terminals are set to “LINE” or “MIC”, and  
both [CH1]/[CH2] of the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/  
MANUAL] selection switches are set to  
“MANUAL”.  
When this item is set to “Link”, [CH2] recording  
level adjustment knob is disabled.  
Int. Mic Wind Cut  
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of  
the audio input signals (low-cut) from the built-in  
microphone. Set this item to “On” to reduce wind  
noise from the microphone.  
ꢀ
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
Equalizer  
Int. Mic Separation  
You can correct the characteristic and enhance the  
sound of the connected microphone using this  
equalizer setting.  
For setting the enhancement level of the stereo  
effect of the built-in microphone.  
ꢀ
1 to 4:  
For setting the audio frequency from a 5-band  
equalizer.  
Enhances the stereo effect. Increasing the value  
increases the stereo effect.  
Effect off:  
ꢀ
Frequency:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
100Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 3.3kHz, 10kHz  
Variable level:  
Does not enhance the stereo effect.  
Mono:  
ꢀ
± 6dB (1dB step)  
Sets the built-in microphone to monaural.  
Memo :  
[Setting Values: 1 to 4, Effect off, Mono (R2)]  
ꢀ
Audio will be recorded in the characteristic set  
Memo :  
in the equalizer.  
ꢀ
When any value from 1 to 4 is selected, the  
sound quality changes slightly due to the  
process of enhancing the stereo effect. This is  
normal.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Set all bands to “0dB” to bypass the equalizer.  
When the equalizer level is set to +side, the  
audio may be distorted. In this case, reduce the  
recording level in Manual mode.  
ꢀ
This menu is enabled when the [CH1]/[CH2]  
selection switch is set to “INT”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
If the values of multiple frequencies are  
changed, the specified levels and the actual  
levels may be different due to interference  
between the frequency bands.  
This function is enabled only when both  
[INPUT1/2 Wind Cut] and [Int. Mic Wind Cut] are  
set to “Off”.  
108  
Monitor  
System Menu  
For setting the audio sound of the [+] terminal to  
stereo or mixed sound when the [MONITOR]  
switch on the LCD monitor is set to “BOTH”.  
This menu screen allows system-related settings.  
For specifying recording settings, formatting and  
restoring of SD card, tally lamp settings, network  
settings, date/time, time zone, and other settings.  
It can also be used to reset the menu settings to  
their default values.  
ꢀ
Mix:  
Outputs mixed sound (mixed sound of CH1 and  
CH2) to both L and R.  
ꢀ
Stereo:  
Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of  
CH1 to L, and CH2 to R).  
Record Set...  
[Setting Values: RMix, Stereo]  
For specifying recorded video-related settings.  
Memo :  
(' P111 [Record Set Item] )  
ꢀ
If both CH1 and CH2 are built-in microphones,  
stereo sound is output from the [+] terminal  
regardless of the [Monitor] setting.  
Media  
ꢀ
Format Media  
For formatting (initializing) an SD card.  
Select a card slot (A or B), select [Format] from  
[Cancel]/[Format], and press the Set button (R) to  
format (initialize) the card.  
Alarm Level  
For selecting whether to turn on the warning tone  
as well as setting the volume.  
The warning tone is output from the monitor  
speaker or [+] terminal.  
(' P41 [Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards] )  
ꢀ
Restore Media  
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low, Off]  
For restoring an SD card.  
Audio On FULL AUTO  
Select a card slot (A or B), and press the Set button  
(R) to restore the SD card.  
For setting whether to enable Auto for audio when  
[FULL AUTO] is set to “ON”.  
(' P42 [Restoring the SD Card] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
SW Set:  
Sets the audio recording mode following the  
ꢀ
This item appears only when the SD card needs  
to be restored. However, it is not selectable  
whenrecordinginCameramodeandduringClip  
Review.  
[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch  
setting.  
ꢀ
Auto:  
Sets audio recording mode to the forced auto  
mode.  
Setup File  
[Setting Values: SW Set, RAuto]  
This allows you to save the menu settings as well  
as the performance results of shutter speed and  
AWB.  
It is useful to save settings according to different  
shooting conditions.  
ꢀ
Load File...  
Loads the settings.  
(' P131 [Loading a Setup File] )  
ꢀ
Store File...  
Saves the settings.  
(' P130 [Saving Setup Files] )  
ꢀ
Delete File...  
Deletes the configured file.  
(' P132 [Deleting Setup Files] )  
109  
ꢀ
Auto Power Off  
Import Metadata  
For importing metadata from the FTP server.  
Memo :  
For setting whether to turn off the power  
automatically when the camera recorder is not  
operated for more than 5 minutes when the battery  
is used. This function is valid only when the battery  
is used.  
ꢀ
This option is not available when [Network] is set  
to “Off”.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
ꢀ
Settings...  
Memo :  
For specifying network-related settings.  
ꢀ
When both the battery and AC adapter are  
connected, power from the AC adapter  
connection will be used. As such, this function  
will not have any effect.  
(' P115 [Settings Item] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
This option is not available when [Network] is set  
to “Off”.  
Tally Lamp  
Reset All  
For specifying the illumination settings of the tally  
lamp during recording.  
Resets all menu settings.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
On:  
Lights up only during recording.  
Off:  
ꢀ
[Date/Time] and [Time Zone] cannot be reset.  
(' P110 [ Date/Time ] )  
ꢀ
Turns off the indicator.  
(' P111 [ Time Zone ] )  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
ꢀ
This item is not selectable when recording in  
Cameramode, duringClipReview, andinMedia  
mode.  
GPS  
For setting the GPS function to On or Off (power  
on/off).  
Date/Time  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
For setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.  
Memo :  
If the signal reception for GPS satellites allows  
date and time to be set based on the GPS  
information, you can set the time obtained from  
the GPS satellite by pressing the [FOCUS  
ASSIST/1] button.  
Network  
To use the network function, set this item to  
“On(SDI Off)” or “On(HDMI Off)”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
On(SDI Off):  
Uses the network function. However, SDI output  
is disabled.  
On(HDMI Off):  
If information cannot be obtained from GPS  
satellites and date/time cannot be set, the  
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] button appears grayed out.  
The display order of the date (year, month, day)  
follows the setting in [Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Date  
Style]. However, the 24-hour format is used for  
the hour display regardless of the [Time Style]  
setting.  
Uses the network function. However, HDMI  
output is disabled.  
Off:  
ꢀ
Does not use the network function.  
[Setting Values: On(SDI Off), On(HDMI Off), ROff]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Restriction applies to the following functions  
when you are using the network function.  
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )  
ꢀ
SDI and HDMI cannot be output  
simultaneously.  
ꢀ
[Variable Frame Rate] cannot be selected.  
[Flash Band Correction] is fixed at “Off”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
[LCD + VF] is fixed at “Off”.  
110  
ꢀ
ꢀ
HD+SD:  
Time Zone  
Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and  
in “SD” (standard definition) for slot B.  
HD+Web:  
For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30  
minutes.  
[Setting Values: UTC-00:30-UTC-12:00, UTC,  
UTC+14:00-UTC+00:30 (in 30 min increments)]  
(Default values: UTC-05:00 (U model), UTC (E  
model))  
Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and  
in low definition for slot B.  
[Setting Values: RHD, SD, HD+SD, HD+Web]  
Caution :  
ꢀ
Memo :  
The selectable options for the [ꢂFormat],  
[ꢂResolution], and [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]  
settings vary depending on the setting of this  
item.  
ꢀ
If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time]  
item is automatically adjusted when [Time  
Zone] is altered.  
ꢀ
ꢂ Format  
System Information  
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to  
ꢀ
Version  
the SD card in slot A.  
Displays information on the firmware version.  
ꢀ
[Setting Values: RQuickTime(MPEG2),  
MP4(MPEG2), MXF(MPEG2), AVCHD]  
Memo :  
Fan Hour  
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When System is set to “HD” or “SD”, the  
recording file format will be the same for both SD  
cards in slots A and B.  
ꢀ
Under normal environment, dust will  
accumulate on the internal fan when the camera  
recorder is used over a long period. Dust may  
enter the camera recorder especially if it is used  
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound  
quality of the camera recorder. Check and  
replace the fan after every 9000 hours  
(suggested guideline).  
When System is set to “SD”, this item is fixed at  
“QuickTime(H.264)”.  
ꢂ Resolution  
For selecting the image size to be recorded to the  
SD card in slot A. (Horizontal x vertical)  
The available options vary according to the  
[ꢂFormat] and [System] settings.  
ꢀ
Open Source License  
ꢀ
When MP4(MPEG2) or QuickTime(MPEG2) is  
selected:  
Displays the license for the open source software  
used by this camera recorder.  
ꢀ
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080,  
1280x720]  
Record Set Item  
Record Format  
ꢀ
ꢀ
WhenQuickTime(H.264) orAVCHDisselected:  
Fixed at “1920x1080”  
When MXF(MPEG2) is selected:  
After setting of all items in the [Record Format]  
menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the  
screen to apply the new settings on the camera  
recorder and switch the record format. A “Please  
Wait...” message appears during switching.  
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080]  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, the  
recording definition will be the same for both SD  
cards in slots A and B.  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “SD”, this item is fixed  
as follows.  
ꢀ
System  
For selecting a system definition.  
ꢀ
U model: Fixed at “720x480”  
ꢀ
HD:  
ꢀ
E model: Fixed at “720x576”  
Records in “HD” (high definition) quality  
SD:  
ꢀ
The selectable values of [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]  
ꢀ
vary according to the setting of this item.  
Records in “SD” (standard definition) quality  
111  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate  
3 Format  
For selecting the frame rate and encoding bit rate  
for recording to the SD card in slot A when [System]  
is set to “HD”, “HD+Web”, or “HD+SD”.  
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to  
the SD card in slot B when [System] is set to “HD  
+Web” or “HD+SD”.  
The available options vary according to the  
[System] and [ꢂResolution] settings.  
This item is fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”.  
ꢀ
3 Resolution  
ꢀ
When “1920x1080” ([ꢂFormat] is set to  
“AVCHD”) is selected:  
For selecting the size of the image to be recorded  
to the SD card in slot B when [System] is set to “HD  
+Web” or “HD+SD”. (Horizontal x vertical)  
Depending on the [System] settings, this item is  
fixed as follows.  
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), 60i(SP),  
50i(SP)]  
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E  
model))  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When “1920x1080” ([ꢂFormat] is set to  
“QuickTime(H.264)”) is selected:  
[Setting Values: 60i(UHQ), 50i(UHQ),  
24p(UHQ)] (Default values: 60i(UHQ) (U  
model), 50i(UHQ) (E model))  
When “1920x1080” ([ꢂFormat] is set to other  
than “AVCHD” or “QuickTime(H.264)”) is  
selected:  
ꢀ
When HD+SD is selected:  
“720x480” (U model), “720x576” (E model)  
When HD+Web is selected:  
Fixed at “480x270”  
ꢀ
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, this item  
is fixed at the same value as [ꢂResolution].  
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 30p(HQ), 24p(HQ),  
50i(HQ), 25p(HQ)]  
ꢀ
3 Frame & Bit Rate  
For selecting the frame rate and encoding bit rate  
of the image to be recorded to the SD card in slot  
B when [System] is set to “HD+Web” or “HD+SD”.  
The options are fixed as follows according to the  
settings for [System] and [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate].  
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E  
model))  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When “1440x1080” is selected:  
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), 60i(SP),  
50i(SP)]  
ꢀ
When HD+SD is selected:  
“60i” (U model), “50i” (E model)  
When HD+Web is selected:  
“30p”, “25p”, or “24p”  
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E  
model))  
When “1280x720” is selected:  
[Setting Values: 60p(HQ), 30p(HQ), 24p(HQ),  
50p(HQ), 25p(HQ), 60p(SP), 50p(SP)]  
(Defaultvalues:60p(HQ)(Umodel), 50p(HQ)(E  
model))  
ꢀ
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, this item  
is fixed at the same value as [ꢂFrame & Bit  
Rate].  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When “HD+SD” is selected, [Frame & Bit Rate]  
cannot be selected.  
ꢀ
SD Aspect  
ꢀ
U model:  
For setting the aspect ratio of the recorded image  
when [System] is set to “HD+SD” or “SD”.  
[Setting Values: R16:9, 4:3]  
50i(HQ), 50i(SP), 50i(UHQ), 50p(SP),  
25p(HQ)  
ꢀ
E model:  
Memo :  
60i(HQ), 60i(SP), 60i(UHQ), 30p(HQ),  
24p(HQ), 24p(UHQ)  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, this  
item is fixed at “16:9”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “SD”, this item is fixed  
as follows for the different models.  
ꢀ
U model: “60i”  
E model: “50i”  
ꢀ
When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, the frame  
rate and encoding bit rate for recording to the SD  
cards in slots A and B will be the same.  
112  
ꢀ
Rec Mode  
Pre Rec Time  
For setting the pre-recording time when [Rec  
ꢀ
For selecting the record mode for recording to  
the SD card.  
Mode] is set to “Pre Rec”.  
(' P76 [Special Recording] )  
[Setting Values: R5sec, 10sec, 15sec]  
ꢀ
The selectable options vary according to the  
[Record Format] menu settings.  
ꢀ
Rec Frames  
For setting the number of frames to record when  
[Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or “Interval Rec”.  
[Setting Values: R1frame, 3frames, 6frames]  
Setting  
Format  
Frame & Bit Rate  
values  
MP4 (MPEG2) 30p(HQ), 24p(HQ), Normal, Pre  
ꢀ
Rec Interval  
QuickTime  
(MPEG2)  
25p(HQ)  
Rec, Clip  
Continuous,  
Interval  
For setting the recording time interval when [Rec  
MXF(MPEG2)  
Mode] is set to “Interval Rec”.  
Rec, Frame  
Rec,  
[Setting Values: R1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec,  
1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 1hour]  
Variable  
Frame  
ꢀ
Variable Frame Rate  
60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), Normal, Pre  
For setting the frame rate during recording when  
[Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”.  
Theavailableoptionsvaryaccordingtothesettings  
for [Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂResolution]/  
[3Resolution] and [ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]/[3Frame  
& Bit Rate].  
60i(SP), 50i(SP),  
Rec, Clip  
60p(HQ), 60p(SP), Continuous,  
50p(HQ), 50p(SP) Interval  
Rec, Frame  
Rec  
AVCHD  
60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), Normal, Pre  
(' P81 [Variable Frame Rec] )  
60i(SP), 50i(SP)  
Rec,  
Interval  
Rec, Frame  
Rec  
QuickTime  
(H.264)  
60i(UHQ)  
50i(UHQ)  
Normal, Pre  
Rec, Clip  
Continuous,  
Interval  
60i (U model)  
50i (E model)  
Rec, Frame  
Rec  
24p(UHQ)  
Normal, Pre  
Rec, Clip  
Continuous,  
Interval  
Rec, Frame  
Rec,  
Variable  
Frame  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, this item is  
fixed at “Normal”.  
[Variable Frame Rate] is enabled when  
[ꢂResolution]/[3Resolution] is set to  
“1920x1080” or “1280x720”, and [ꢂFrame & Bit  
Rate]/[3Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “30p(HQ)”,  
“24p(HQ)”, or “25p(HQ)”.  
ꢀ
113  
Slot Mode  
Time Stamp  
For setting the operation of the card slot.  
For setting whether to display shooting date/time  
information in the recorded video.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
ꢀ
Series:  
Mode that activates the two slots sequentially.  
Dual:  
ꢀ
Memo :  
Mode that activates the two slots at the same  
time.  
ꢀ
The date/time display style can be changed in  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Date Style]/  
[Time Style].  
(' P73 [Dual Rec] )  
Backup:  
ꢀ
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )  
Mode that enables recording to slot B without  
using the [REC] button. This item is selectable  
only when [Rec Mode] is set to “Normal”.  
Start or stop the recording using the [Backup  
Rec] menu or press the [USER1] to [USER7],  
[LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD KEY▼], [LCD  
KEY◀] that is assigned with “Backup Trig”.  
(' P74 [Backup Rec] )  
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )  
ꢀ
When the date/time is hidden while the menu  
screen, status screen or other screen is  
displayed, the date/time during this period will  
not be recorded to the video. A confirmation  
screen appears if you try to display the menu  
screen or status screen during recording.  
When [System] is set to “HD+Web” or “HD+SD”,  
the shooting date/time information cannot be  
recorded to the image to be recorded in slot B.  
ꢀ
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When this is set to “Series”, and recordable  
media are inserted in both slots, pressing the  
[REC] button starts recording only to the card in  
the selected slot (active slot).  
Clip Set  
ꢀ
Clip Name Prefix  
When “Series” is selected, and [Record  
Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat] is set to “AVCHD”, the  
clips are recorded over the slots seamlessly  
without interruption in the video.  
For setting the first four characters of the name of  
the clip file to be recorded to the SD card.  
Enter any of the 38 characters including alphabets  
(upper case), numbers (0 to 9), “_” (underscore),  
and “-” (hyphen) using the software keyboard.  
(' P93 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )  
[Setting Values: xxxG] (The default value of xxx is  
the last three digits of the serial number.)  
When this is set to “Dual”, and recordable media  
are inserted in both slots, pressing the [REC]  
button starts simultaneous recording to the  
cards in both slots.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Backup Rec  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFormat] is set to  
“AVCHD”, this setting is not reflected in the file  
name of the clip.  
For starting/stopping backup recording with [REC]/  
[STBY].  
This item is selectable only when [Slot Mode] is set  
to “Backup”.  
However, it is recorded as the display name of  
the clip in the thumbnail display.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When recording is stopped due to no remaining  
space on the media, etc., this item is fixed at  
“STOP” and cannot be selected.  
ꢀ
Reset Clip Number  
For assigning a new number (Clip Number) by  
resetting it (0001).  
Select [Reset] and press the Set button (R) to reset  
the number.  
When [ꢂFormat] is set to “AVCHD”, the clip  
number is reset to “00000”.  
When other clips exist on the SD card, the smallest  
available number is used after reset.  
ꢀ
Example:  
If the [Clip Name Prefix] is “ABCD”, and  
“ABCD0001” already exists on the SD card,  
“ABCD0002” will be assigned.  
114  
Settings Item  
Metadata Server  
For specifying network-related settings.  
For registering the FTP server for importing the  
metadata and the path of the file to be imported.  
Up to 4 settings can be registered.  
The display of the software keyboard for input  
varies according to the item you are setting.  
(' P93 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )  
ꢀ
Meta-FTP1 to Meta-FTP4  
(The name specified in the respective  
[Alias] items is displayed)  
Web  
For setting the functions that make use of the web  
browser.  
oꢀAlias  
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this  
camera recorder.  
ꢀ
Web Access  
The name set in this item will be displayed in the  
[Import Metadata] options.  
To access via a web browser, set to “On”.  
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]  
* Enter not more than 31 characters.  
oꢀServer  
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)  
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP  
server.  
* Enter not more than 127 characters using single-  
byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to 9),  
single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].  
ꢀ
Camera Name  
For setting the name to be displayed on the web  
browser. Enter not more than 8 characters using  
the software keyboard.  
(Default value: HM650)  
ꢀ
Change Password  
Changes the password for accessing via a web  
browser.  
oꢀPort  
The current password is displayed. Enter a new  
password directly.  
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an  
integer between 1 and 65535.  
(Default value: 21)  
Enter not more than 31 characters using the  
software keyboard.  
oꢀFile Path  
Enter the path name for the metadata file (“/pub/  
meta.xml”, “/home/user/meta2.xml”, etc.)  
Connection Setup  
For configuring the network connection settings.  
Configure the settings by following the instructions  
on the [Wizard] screen that is displayed according  
to the type of adapter that is connected to the rear  
[HOST] terminal.  
You can Store, Load, or Delete the settings you  
have specified on the [Wizard] screen.  
* Enter not more than 127 characters.  
oꢀUsername  
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP  
server.  
* Enter not more than 31 characters.  
oꢀPassword  
ꢀ
Wizard  
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP  
server.  
A [Wizard] screen appears according to the type of  
adapter that is connected to the rear [HOST]  
terminal.  
* Enter not more than 31 characters.  
oꢀPASV Mode  
Follow the instructions.  
Forsettingwhethertosetthecommunicationmode  
used for file transfer to the passive mode.  
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a  
connection from the FTP server to the camera  
cannot be established.  
ꢀ
Load  
Loads the settings on the [Wizard] screen.  
(' P156 [Reading the Connection Settings  
File] )  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
ꢀ
Store  
Saves the settings on the [Wizard] screen.  
(' P155 [Saving the Connection Settings File] )  
ꢀ
Delete  
Deletes the saved settings.  
(' P156 [Deleting Connection Settings] )  
115  
Clip Server  
For setting the server and directory for uploading  
recorded clips in the SD card to the FTP server.  
ꢀ
Clip-FTP1 to Clip-FTP4  
(The name specified in the respective  
[Alias] items is displayed)  
oꢀAlias  
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this  
camera recorder.  
The name set in this item will appear on the [FTP  
Upload] action screen of the thumbnail display.  
* Enter not more than 31 characters.  
oꢀServer  
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)  
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP  
server.  
* Enter not more than 127 characters using single-  
byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to 9),  
single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].  
oꢀPort  
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an  
integer between 1 and 65535.  
(Default value: 21)  
oꢀDir. Path  
Enter the path name for the directory to upload to  
(“/pub”, “/home/user”, etc.)  
* Enter not more than 127 characters.  
oꢀUsername  
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP  
server.  
* Enter not more than 31 characters.  
oꢀPassword  
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP  
server.  
* Enter not more than 31 characters.  
oꢀPASV Mode  
Forsettingwhethertosetthecommunicationmode  
used for file transfer to the passive mode.  
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a  
connection from the FTP server to the camera  
cannot be established.  
[Setting Values: On, ROff]  
Reset Network  
Restores all items in the [Network] menu to their  
default settings.  
116  
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu  
Adding/Editing  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main  
Menu] screen.  
Select the menu or submenu item to add.  
Frequently Used Menu  
Items (Favorites Menu)  
You can select and add/edit frequently used menu  
items freely to create a personal menu screen  
(Favorites Menu).  
2
Memo :  
ꢀ
[Favorites Menu] is only enabled in the Camera  
mode. [Favorites Menu] remains unchanged  
even when the recording format changes.  
Up to 20 menu items can be added.  
Added items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset  
even when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Reset All] is  
executed.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be  
Long descriptive names may be displayed for  
the menu items in [Favorites Menu] to enable  
better understanding.  
performed in the following cases. [USER1 Add]  
is displayed in gray in the operation guide.  
ꢀ
Selected item is already added to [Favorites  
Menu].  
ꢀ
Number of menu items that can be added (20  
MENU/THUMB  
DISPLAY  
items) is exceeded.  
ꢂ
ꢃ
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.  
CANCEL  
A screen to confirm the addition appears.  
Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).  
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites  
Menu].  
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
TIME CODE  
OIS / 2  
4
CANCEL  
.
.
117  
Editing Favorites Menu  
ꢃ
Press the [OIS/2] button.  
A delete mark (ꢊ) appears at the beginning of  
the menu item.  
You can delete or change the order of the items  
added to [Favorites Menu].  
Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]  
ꢀ
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.  
A
Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main  
Menu] screen.  
B
Press the [STATUS] button to open the  
[Favorites Menu] screen.  
ꢁ
Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set  
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).  
The header turns magenta and the editing  
mode is activated.  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
When the [OIS/2] button is pressed again while  
the menu item with the delete mark (ꢊ) is  
selected, the menu item will be excluded from  
the items to be deleted and the delete mark (ꢊ)  
disappears.  
ꢄ
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.  
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]  
editing mode appears.  
Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set  
button (R).  
2
ꢅ
Header  
(Magenta)  
6
.
ꢂ
Select the menu or submenu item to delete.  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Deletion is not complete until the changes are  
saved with [Save & Exit].  
To exit the editing mode without deleting any  
items, select [Exit without Saving].  
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].  
3
.
118  
Changing the Order of Items in [Favorites  
Menu]  
ꢂ
Select the menu or submenu item to move  
and press the Set button (R).  
The moving mode is activated and a position  
selection bar for the move appears.  
MENU/THUMB  
DISPLAY  
CANCEL  
3
MENU/THUMB  
AE LEVEL  
FOCUS ASSIST/1  
TIME CODE  
OIS / 2  
CANCEL  
Position  
.
Selection Bar  
ꢀ
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.  
A
Press the [MENU] button to open the  
[Favorites Menu] screen.  
.
ꢃ
Select the position to move to with the  
cross-shaped button (JK).  
B
Press the [DISPLAY] button to open the  
[Favorites Menu] screen.  
Move the position selection bar with the cross-  
shaped button (JK) and select a position to  
move to.  
ꢁ
Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set  
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).  
The header turns magenta and the editing  
mode is activated.  
ꢄ
Press the Set button (R).  
The selected item moves to the new position.  
4
5
2
Header  
(Magenta)  
.
.
119  
ꢅ
ꢆ
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.  
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]  
editing mode appears.  
Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set  
button (R).  
Display Screen in Camera  
Mode  
Display 0 screen  
This screen displays the event. It is also used to  
display warnings only.  
A
a
Z
282min  
100min  
50min  
W
7
※1  
※2  
12.5/30fps  
D
ND 1/64  
AE+  
0dB  
F16  
1/100  
0
6
.
Memo :  
P13000K  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Moving is not complete until the changes are  
H I J  
.
saved with [Save & Exit].  
*1 Appears only during warnings  
*2 Appears only during operation  
To exit the editing mode without saving any  
changes, select [Exit without Saving].  
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].  
Display 1 screen  
b
a
Z
Y
X
A
282min  
100min  
50min  
00:00:00.00  
W
V
U
※
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
12.5/30fps  
D
G
T
S
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
R
P
Q
O
0
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
Pꢀ13000K  
H I J K  
L
M N  
.
* Appears only during warnings  
Display 2 screen  
b
a
Z
Y
X
A
B
C
282min  
100min  
50min  
00:00:00.00  
W
V
U
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
D
E
F
12.5/30fps  
1920x1080  
30p HQ  
T
S
5 . 6f t  
ND 1 /64  
AE+6  
R
P
Q
O
0
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
4030 20 10  
0
G
Pꢀ13000K  
H I J K  
L
M N  
.
120  
A
B
E
OK Mark  
Resolution  
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.  
(' P88 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )  
Displays the video image resolution.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Voltage/Battery Power  
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Format] is set to “Off”.  
Displays the current status of the power supply  
in use.  
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )  
(' P105 [ Record Format ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
F
Frame Rate/Bit Rate  
Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens  
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.  
during warnings only.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
C
Remaining Space on Media  
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Format] is set to “Off”.  
Displays the remaining recording time of the SD  
cards in slot A and slot B separately.  
ꢂ
ꢂ 2  
:
:
Currently selected slot. (White card)  
(' P105 [ Record Format ] )  
Write-protect switch of SD card is set.  
ꢂ!INVALID  
ꢂ!FORMAT  
ꢂ!RESTORE  
:
SD card cannot be read or  
written to, or restored.  
SD card requires  
G
Audio Level Meter  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.  
ꢀ appears on the screen when in the Auto  
mode.  
:
formatting.  
:
:
SD card requires restoring.  
When [Rec Mode] is set to  
other than “AVCHD”/“SD”  
with a Class 4 SD card  
inserted.  
ꢂ!INCORRECT  
4030 20 10  
0
.
ꢀ
When [Rec Mode]ꢀ-ꢀ[Rec Mode] is set to  
“Frame Rec”, “Interval Rec”, or “Variable  
Frame”, audio cannot be recorded and is  
indicated by the [ mark.  
Or when the SD card is not  
supported.  
ꢂ!REC INH  
:
When attempting to record  
in 50i(HQ)/50i(SP) to an SD  
card recorded in  
[AVCHD]ꢀ60i(HQ)/60i(SP)  
(or vice versa).  
4030 20  
0
.
Memo :  
Memo :  
ꢀ
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Media  
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will  
be displayed.  
ꢀ
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio Meter]  
is set to “Off”.  
(' P105 [ Audio Meter ] )  
(' P105 [ Media Remain ] )  
H
GPS Mark  
ꢀ
Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens  
during warnings only. (When the remaining time  
is shorter than 3 minutes)  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[GPS] is set  
to “On”, the signal reception status is displayed.  
(' P110 [ GPS ] )  
ꢀ
The displayed time is an estimate.  
Memo :  
D
Frame rate  
ꢀ
The display changes according to the signal  
reception sensitivity. If signals cannot be  
received, the ꢇ mark appears in yellow.  
This item is not displayed when [GPS] is set to  
“Off”.  
Displayed as xx/yy fps (xx: recording frame rate,  
yy: playback frame rate) only when [Rec Mode]  
is set to “Variable Frame”.  
ꢀ
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )  
121  
I
M
Volume Operation Indicator  
Shutter  
ꢀ
Displayed when there are changes made to the  
volume of the headphone, speaker (0 to 15),  
and the values of LCD BRIGHT, PEAKING (-10  
to +10).  
The current shutter speed is displayed when  
the shutter is set to “On”.  
(' P95 [ Shutter ] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ is displayed when the [FULL AUTO] switch  
is set to “ON” to enable Full Auto shooting  
mode, or when the [SHUTTER] button is  
pressed to enable automatic shutter mode.  
0
12  
LCD BRIGHT  
PEAKING  
-10  
0
Memo :  
ꢀ
The variable range of the shutter speed varies  
according to the video format settings.  
(' P54 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )  
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when  
there is a change.  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
There is no audio output from the speaker in  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Camera mode.  
If the shutter speed is not displayed, the shutter  
is OFF.  
J
Flash Band Correction Mark  
This item is displayed when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[Flash Band Correction] is  
set to “On”.  
N
O
Iris F-Number  
Displays F-number of the lens iris.  
(' P95 [ Flash Band Correction ] )  
Gain  
K
ꢀ
ꢀ
Image Stabilizer Mark  
Displays the gain value.  
Displayed when the image stabilizer is ON.  
ꢀ is displayed in the ALC mode during  
Manual shooting.  
ꢄ
:
When [Level] of [OIS] is set to  
“Normal”.  
When [Level] of [OIS] is set to  
“High”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢆ
is displayed when AE LOCK is set to “ON”.  
“LUX30” or “LUX36” is displayed when in the  
low-light shooting mode.  
ꢅ
:
Memo :  
ꢀ
Memo :  
ꢀ
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when  
If image stabilizer is set to “OFF” when the  
Display 0 screen is displayed, ꢋ appears for 3  
seconds.  
there is a change.  
P
AE Level  
ꢀ
Appears when the AE function is activated,  
and [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[AE Level] is set to a value other than  
“Normal”.  
ꢀ
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when  
there is a change.  
L
White Balance Mode  
Displays the current white balance mode.  
(*****K indicates color temperature)  
(' P95 [ AE Level ] )  
ꢀ
When operated while manual operation is  
disabled, “AE” blinks for about 5 seconds.  
When face detection is enabled and [Face  
Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, ꢃ appears on the  
left side of “AE”.  
A<*****K> : When the white balance is set to  
Auto A.  
ꢀ
B<*****K> : When the white balance is set to  
Auto B.  
P<*****K> : When the white balance is set to  
Preset.  
(' P50 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face  
Detection] )  
ꢀ
<FAW> : During Full Auto White Balance  
mode.  
ꢆ
<FAW> : When [AE LOCK] is set to “On”  
during Full Auto White Balance  
mode.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when  
there is a change.  
122  
Q
U
ND Filter Position  
Date/Time Display  
Displays the current ND filter position.  
Displays the current date and time.  
Memo :  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[ND Filter] is  
set to “Off”.  
The date/time display style can be specified in  
[Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Date Style]/[Time Style].  
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )  
(' P105 [ ND Filter ] )  
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when  
there is a change.  
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Date/Time] is  
set to “Off”.  
R
Focus Display  
ꢀ
Displays the value of the focal length during  
manual focus.  
(' P106 [ Date/Time ] )  
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Time Stamp] is set to “On”, this item is  
not displayed.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
# is displayed during Auto Focus.  
When face detection is enabled, ꢃ appears  
on the left side of #.  
(' P114 [ Time Stamp ] )  
(' P50 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face  
Detection] )  
V
Zoom Display  
(' P97 [ Face Detect ] )  
ꢀ
Displays the zoom position. (Zoom bar or  
value)  
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can specify whether to display the focus  
value (“Feet”/“Meter”) or turn off the display in  
[Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Focus].  
ꢀ
The zoom bar will only be displayed for 3  
seconds after the zoom operation is  
activated.  
ꢀ
The value will always be displayed. (0 to 99)  
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is  
selected.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can specify the display method (Number/  
Bar) and whether to turn off the display in [LCD/  
VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ“Zoom”.  
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is  
selected.  
(' P105 [ Focus ] )  
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when  
there is a change.  
ꢀ
S
Focus Assist  
(' P105 [ Zoom ] )  
ꢀ
“FOCUS” is displayed when auto focus is  
activated.  
ꢀ
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when  
there is a change.  
ꢀ
When ACCU-Focus is enabled, “ACCU-  
FOCUS” blinks for about 10 seconds while  
Focus Assist starts up, after which the  
“FOCUS” indicator lights up.  
If recording starts while [ACCU-Focus] is  
active, [ACCU-Focus] will be forcibly  
deactivated.  
W
Network Connection Icon  
ꢀ
When [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Network]  
is set to “On”, the network connection status  
is displayed.  
ꢀ
This icon is not displayed when “Off” is  
selected.  
(' P103 [ Focus Assist ] )  
Icon  
Status  
Memo :  
Connection is not established  
(starting up, preparing for  
connection)  
ꢀ
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when  
.
there is a change.  
(Blink)  
T
Luminance Information  
Connection is not established  
(preparing for connection)  
Displayed when the Spot Meter function is  
activated.  
.
(Yellow)  
(' P68 [Setting Spot Meter] )  
MAX  
MIN  
Connection is established  
:
:
Maximum luminance  
Minimum luminance  
.
When a USB adapter different  
from the connection settings is  
detected  
.
(No display) When an incompatible USB  
adapter is detected, or when  
[Network] is set to “Off”  
123  
X
a
Time Code (ꢌ)/User’s Bit (ꢍ) Display  
Media Status  
ꢀ
Displays the time code (hour: minute:  
second: frame) or user’s bit data.  
Example of time code display:  
----  
:
No card found in the selected  
slot  
ꢀ
STBY  
:
:
:
Recording standby  
Recording  
RREC  
REVIEW  
00:00:00:00  
Clip Review  
(' P71 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately  
※
.
(Clip Review)] )  
STBY P  
:
Pre Rec recording standby  
* Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot (.)  
(' P76 [Pre Rec] )  
RRECP Pre Rec recording  
(' P76 [Pre Rec] )  
STBY C  
denotes drop frames.  
:
ꢀ
Example of user’s bit display:  
:
Clip Continuous Rec recording  
standby  
FF EE DD 20  
.
(' P77 [Clip Continuous Rec] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
RRECC  
:
Clip Continuous Rec recording  
You can specify whether to display the time  
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/UB].  
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is  
selected.  
(' P77 [Clip Continuous Rec] )  
STBYC  
:
Clip Continuous Rec recording  
pause  
(displayed in  
yellow)  
(' P77 [Clip Continuous Rec] )  
(' P105 [ TC/UB ] )  
STBY ꢉ  
:
Interval Rec recording standby  
Y
Time Code Lock Indicator  
(' P79 [Interval Rec] )  
When the built-in time code generator is  
synchronized to the external time code data  
input during the synchronization of time code  
with another camera recorder, ꢆ lights up.  
(' P67 [Synchronizing Time Code on Another  
Camera] )  
STBYꢉ  
(displayed in  
red)  
:
Interval recording pause  
RRECꢉ  
:
Interval Rec recording  
(' P79 [Interval Rec] )  
STBY ꢈ  
(' P78 [Frame Rec] )  
RRECꢈ Frame Rec recording  
:
Frame Rec recording standby  
Z
Event/Warning Display Area  
:
Displays error messages.  
(' P157 [Error Messages and Actions] )  
(' P78 [Frame Rec] )  
STBYꢈ  
:
Frame Rec recording pause  
(displayed in  
yellow)  
(' P78 [Frame Rec] )  
STOP  
:
Unable to record to the card in  
the slot  
P.OFF  
:
Power OFF  
b
Dual Rec/Backup Rec Display  
“DUAL” is displayed in the Dual Rec mode and  
“BACKUP” is displayed in the Backup Rec  
mode.  
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
This item is not displayed when [Slot Mode] is  
set to “Series”.  
Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens  
during warnings only. (When the remaining time  
is shorter than 3 minutes)  
ꢀ
124  
A
B
Media  
Display Screen in Media  
Mode  
Media Display 0 Screen  
This screen displays the media status or event. It  
is also used to display warnings only.  
ꢀ
Displays the media slot (A or B) of the  
currently played clip.  
ꢀ
2 appears when the write-protect switch of  
the SD card is set.  
Voltage/Battery Power  
Displays the current status of the power supply  
in use.  
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )  
O
NM L  
K
A
Memo :  
1000/2000  
282min  
※
ꢀ
Displayed in the Media Display 0 screen during  
warnings only.  
C
D
E
Resolution  
Displays the video image resolution.  
Frame Rate/Bit Rate  
0
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.  
Operation Guide  
Displays a guide for the current operation  
buttons.  
G
H
.
* Appears only during warnings  
F
Audio Level Meter  
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.  
Media Display 1 Screen  
O
NM L  
K
J
A
B
C
4030 20 10  
0
1000/2000  
282min  
1920x1080  
60i HQ  
00:00:00.00  
.
Memo :  
D
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
I
ꢀ
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio Meter]  
is set to “Off”.  
(' P105 [ Audio Meter ] )  
0
4030 20 10  
0
F
G
Volume Operation Indicator  
ꢀ
Displayed when there are changes made to  
the volume of the headphone, speaker (0 to  
15), and the value of LCD BRIGHT (-10 to  
+10).  
G
H
.
Media Display 2 Screen  
ꢀ
The[PEAKING+/-]operationisdisabledinthe  
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “-10”.  
O
NM L  
K
J
A
B
C
1000/2000  
282min  
1920x1080  
60i HQ  
00:00:00.00  
(' P122 [Volume Operation Indicator] )  
D
Jan 24,2012  
12 :34 :56  
I
E
0
4030 20 10  
0
F
G
H
.
125  
H
J
Information Display  
Time Code (ꢌ)/User’s Bit (ꢍ) Display  
ꢀ
Use the [AE LOCK/4] button to switch between  
camera information display, GPS display and  
turning off the display.  
Displays the time code (hour: minute:  
second: frame) or user’s bit data.  
Example of time code display:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The GPS display displays information on the  
recording location of the video being played  
back only when GPS information has been  
recorded.  
00:00:00:00  
※
.
* Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot (.)  
Camera information display displays only  
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White  
Balance that have been recorded.  
denotes drop frames.  
ꢀ
Example of user’s bit display:  
FF EE DD 20  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
0dB  
F1.6  
1/100  
You can specify whether to display the time  
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in [TC/UB]  
of [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display  
Settings].  
Pꢁ13000K  
AE LOCK/4  
Camera Information  
Display  
Hide  
(' P105 [ TC/UB ] )  
AE LOCK/4  
K
L
Event/Warning Display Area  
Displays error messages.  
+35.483197  
(' P157 [Error Messages and Actions] )  
Media Status  
+139.652172  
Oct 30,2012  
07:01:58PM  
AE LOCK/4  
PLAY  
STILL  
FWD *  
:
:
:
Playing  
GPS Display  
Still picture playback mode  
High-speed playback in the  
forward direction (* playback  
speed: 5x or 15x)  
.
I
Date/Time Display  
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the  
currently played SD card.  
REV *  
:
High-speed playback in the  
reverse direction (* reverse  
playback speed: 5x or 15x)  
Stop mode  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The date/time display style can be specified in  
[LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Date Style]/  
[Time Style].  
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )  
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )  
STOP  
P.OFF  
Check Mark  
:
:
Power OFF  
M
N
O
Displayed when the currently played clip is  
selected.  
OK Mark  
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.  
(' P88 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )  
Clip Information  
Displays current clip number/total number of  
clips.  
126  
Audio Level Screen  
Status Screen  
For checking the settings of the camera recorder.  
For checking audio related information such as  
microphone volume level.  
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )  
Camera Information Screen  
For checking information related to shooting using  
the camera recorder.  
.
Video Screen  
For checking the settings related to video output.  
(' P106 [Video Set Item] )  
.
USER Switch Set Screen  
For checking the status (functions assigned) of the  
user buttons.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
.
Network Screen  
For checking the network-related settings.  
(' P115 [ Wizard ] )  
.
Audio Screen  
For checking the settings related to audio input.  
(' P107 [Audio Set Item] )  
.
.
127  
Marker and Safety Zone  
Displays (Camera Mode  
Only)  
Color Bar Output  
Color bars can be output on this camera recorder.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output  
simultaneously with the color bar output.  
(' P108 [ Test Tone ] )  
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in  
helping you determine the angle of view for the  
image according to the shooting purpose.  
ꢀ
Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = “4:3”,  
[Aspect Marker] = “Line+Halftone”, and [Center  
Mark] = “On”  
To Output the Color Bar Using the Menu  
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure  
below.  
Safety Zone  
Center Mark  
ꢀ
Set [Camera Function]ꢀ-ꢀ[Bars] to “On”.  
(' P95 [ Bars ] )  
Color bars are output.  
To Output the Color Bar Using the User Button  
ꢀ
Assign the “Bars” function to any of the  
user buttons.  
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )  
ꢁ
Press the user button that is assigned with  
“Bars”.  
Aspect Marker  
Color bars are output.  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can turn On/Off the safety zone and center  
mark displays using [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Marker  
Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone], and  
[Center Mark].  
(' P105 [ Safety Zone ] )  
Smoothening the Skin  
Color (Skin Detail  
Function)  
The Skin Detail function can be used to reduce the  
contour enhancement of video signals for only the  
skin areas so as to produce a smoother skin tone.  
ꢀ
Set [Skin Detail] to “On”.  
(' P101 [ Skin Detail ] )  
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Process]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Detail]/[Adjust]ꢀ-ꢀ[Skin Detail] to “On”.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can specify the adjustment level for the  
contour enhancement of the skin tone in [Main  
Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[Camera Process]ꢀ-ꢀ[Detail]/[Adjust]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Skin Detail]/[Level].  
(' P101 [ Level ] )  
128  
ꢂ
Adjusting Color Matrix  
Adjust Saturation.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to move  
the cursor to Saturation.  
ꢀ
The color matrix of the camera recorder can be  
adjusted to a color of the user’s preference.  
When shooting is performed using multiple  
cameras, the colors of the different cameras can  
be adjusted, and a color of the user’s preference  
can be set on this camera recorder.  
Each of the colors changes in the direction  
indicated by the arrow on the vector scope.  
Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)  
moves the color outward from the center of  
the circle on the vector scope.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Pressing the cross-shaped button (K)  
moves the color toward to the center of the  
circle on the vector scope.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The Saturation, Hue and Lightness of the  
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in  
total) can be set individually.  
Adjust the color on the vector scope and  
Red  
Cyan  
waveform monitor using the DSC color chart.  
R
Mg  
R
I
Mg  
I
* The adjusted values of “Standard”, “Cinema  
Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color Matrix]  
can be stored individually.  
Y
Y
B
B
B
B
G
(' P100 [ Color Matrix ] )  
Cy  
G
I
Cy  
Yellow  
Green  
Blue  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Select [Camera Process]ꢀ-ꢀ[Color Matrix]/  
[Adjust].  
R
R
Mg  
Mg  
I
Y
Y
Y
(' P100 [ Adjust ] )  
B
Adjust Hue.  
G
G
Cy  
ꢀ
Cy  
Select the color using the cross-shaped  
button (JK) and confirm using the cross-  
shaped button (I). (The cursor moves to  
Hue.)  
Magenta  
R
R
Mg  
Mg  
I
I
YI  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)  
rotates the hue in the clockwise direction on  
the vector scope.  
B
G
G
Cy  
Cy  
.
Pressing the cross-shaped button (K)  
rotates the hue in the anti-clockwise  
direction on the vector scope.  
ꢃ
Adjust Lightness.  
ꢀ
Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)  
lightens; and pressing the cross-shaped  
button (K) darkens.  
Red  
Cyan  
R
R
Mg  
Mg  
I
I
ꢀ
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to return  
the cursor to Hue.  
Y
Y
B
B
G
G
Cy  
Cy  
Yellow  
Green  
Blue  
R
R
Mg  
Mg  
I
I
Y
Y
B
B
G
G
Cy  
Mg  
Cy  
Mg  
Magenta  
R
R
I
I
Y
Y
B
B
G
G
Cy  
Cy  
.
129  
Saving Setup Files  
Configuring Setup Files  
ꢀ
Display the [Setup File] menu.  
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Setup File]  
and press the Set button (R).  
The menu settings can be stored on the camera  
recorder or an SD card by saving them as a setup  
file.  
(' P109 [ Setup File ] )  
Loading a saved setup file enables you to  
reproduce the appropriate setup state speedily.  
Two types of setup files are available.  
oꢀScene file:  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Select [Store File] and press the Set button  
(R).  
Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and  
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from  
video format settings to image creation settings  
such as device settings and shooting conditions,  
as well as the contents of the [Favorites Menu].  
oꢀPicture file:  
File that contains image creation settings in  
accordance to the shooting conditions ([Camera  
Process] menu items).  
(' P98 [Camera Process Menu] )  
Memo :  
press the Set button (R).  
The existing files are displayed.  
ꢃ
Select the file to be newly saved (or  
overwritten) using the cross-shaped  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
4
ꢀ
Make use of the [Setup File] menu to save or  
load a setup file.  
ꢀ
The following operations can be performed on  
the [Setup File] menu.  
ꢀ
[Saving Setup Files] P 130  
.
ꢀ
[Loading a Setup File] P 131  
ꢀ
[Deleting Setup Files] P 132  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Files cannot be written in the following cases.  
(Displayed in gray, selection disabled)  
Number of Storable Setup Files  
ꢀ
When the inserted SD card is not supported or  
Camera recorder  
SD slot A  
SD slot B  
:
:
:
[CAM1] to [CAM4]  
[ꢀꢂꢀ1ꢀ] to [ꢀꢂꢀ8ꢀ]  
[ꢀ3ꢀ1ꢀ] to [ꢀ3ꢀ8ꢀ]  
not formatted. (File name appears as “---”.)  
ꢀ
When a write-protected SD card is inserted  
(a 2 mark appears beside the SD card icon).  
Compatibility  
oꢀScene file  
ꢄ
Name the file.  
ꢀ
Enter the subname using the software  
keyboard.  
ꢀ
Only scene files of the GY-HM600 and  
GY-HM650 series can be loaded.  
When the scene files saved using GY-HM650  
are loaded, the functions that only exist on  
GY-HM650 are ignored.  
(' P93 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
You can enter up to 8 characters for the  
[Store File]/[Picture File] subname.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
oꢀPicture file  
Only picture files of the GY-HM600 and GY-HM650  
series can be loaded.  
When overwriting an existing file, the subname  
of the existing file is displayed.  
ꢀ
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or  
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the  
previous screen.  
130  
Loading a Setup File  
ꢅ
Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).  
ꢀ
Display the [Setup File] menu.  
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Setup File]  
and press the Set button (R).  
(' P109 [ Setup File ] )  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Select [Load File] and press the Set button  
5
(R).  
Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and  
press the Set button (R).  
6
The existing files are displayed.  
.
ꢃ
Select the file to load using the cross-  
shaped button (JK), and press the Set  
button (R).  
ꢆ
Save the file.  
ꢀ
A confirmation screen appears when you  
choose to overwrite.  
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation  
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving  
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the  
screen.  
4
.
7
Memo :  
ꢀ
When the write-protect switch of the inserted SD  
card is set, a 2 mark appears beside the SD  
card icon. Setup files can be loaded from an SD  
card even if the write-protect switch is set.  
Setup files that are completely incompatible will  
not be displayed.  
.
ꢀ
Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the  
screen when the file is newly saved.  
ꢀ
(' P130 [Configuring Setup Files] )  
ꢄ
Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,  
and press the Set button (R).  
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the  
screen.  
.
ꢇ
Saving is complete.  
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”  
appears on the screen, and the menu screen  
closes automatically.  
5
.
ꢅ
Reading is complete.  
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”  
appears on the screen, and the menu screen  
closes automatically.  
131  
Deleting Setup Files  
Managing/Editing Clips on  
a PC  
ꢀ
Display the [Setup File] menu.  
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Setup File]  
and press the Set button (R).  
Loading Clips to the PC (USB  
(' P109 [ Setup File ] )  
Connection Mode)  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Select [Delete File] and press the Set button  
(R).  
ꢀ
ꢀ
You can load clips to a PC by connecting the  
camera recorder to the PC via the USB port.  
Doing so enables clips stored in the SD card to  
be managed and edited on the PC.  
Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and  
press the Set button (R).  
The existing files are displayed.  
Files on the SD card can be managed/edited on  
the connected PC in this mode only for USB  
mass storage class devices that are recognized  
by the said PC as a peripheral drive.  
ꢃ
Select the file to delete using the cross-  
shaped button (JK), and press the Set  
button (R).  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Files cannot be written to the SD card.  
Make sure to manage/edit files recorded in the  
MP4 file format using the (JVC ProHD Clip  
Manager) PC application software in the  
bundled CD-ROM.  
4
ꢀ
For details on how to install the application  
software, refer to the [User's Guide] of the [JVC  
ProHD Clip Manager] inside the bundled CD-  
ROM.  
.
ꢀ
Connect the camera recorder to the PC  
using a USB cable.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Scene files saved on the SD card cannot be  
A confirmation message “Change to USB  
Mode?” to enable the USB connection appears.  
deleted.  
ꢄ
Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,  
and press the Set button (R).  
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the  
screen.  
1
T
U
P
IN  
2
T
U
P
IN  
BA  
TT  
.R  
EL  
EA  
SE  
X
AU  
A
P
/C  
O
W
G
E
R
H
R
EC  
D
E
V
IC  
E
A
V
HD  
SD  
/S  
D
I
B
H
DM  
I
DEVICE  
AV  
R
E
M
OT  
E
HO  
D
C
5
PC  
.
ꢅ
Deletion is complete.  
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”  
appears on the screen.  
.
132  
When your PC cannot recognize the SD  
card  
Confirm and update the OS of your PC.  
ꢁ
Select [Change] using the cross-shaped  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
The camera recorder switches to USB mode.  
OS  
Description  
Necessary to update to SP2  
Windows XP/  
Windows XP SP1 or higher.  
Windows XP SP2/ Necessary to download the  
Windows XP SP3 update software.  
(KB955704)  
2
http://www.microsoft.com/  
downloads/details.aspx?  
familyid=1CBE3906-  
.
DDD1-4CA2-B727-  
Memo :  
C2DFF5E30F61&  
ꢀ
If recording is in progress, the “Change to USB  
Mode?” message appears after recording  
stops.  
displaylang=en  
Windows Vista  
Necessary to update to SP1  
or higher.  
ꢀ
If playback is in progress, the camera recorder  
switches to USB mode after the file closes  
automatically, such as when playback stops.  
Windows Vista SP1/ Necessary to download the  
Windows Vista SP2 update software.  
(KB975823)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
32 bit version  
Disconnecting  
http://  
www.microsoft.com/  
downloads/en/  
details.aspx?  
ꢀ
Disable the connection on the PC, then remove  
the USB cable from the camera recorder.  
Doing so exits the USB mode and switches the  
camera recorder to Camera mode.  
ꢀ
FamilyID=2d1abe01-  
0942-4f8aabb2-  
2ad529de00a1  
64 bit version  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The procedure for disabling the USB connection  
varies according to the PC in use. For details,  
refer to the instruction manual of the PC.  
http://  
www.microsoft.com/  
downloads/en/  
details.aspx?  
FamilyID=7d54c53f-017c  
-4ea5-  
ae08-34c3452ba315  
Windows 7  
Necessary to download the  
update software.  
(KB976422)  
ꢀ
32 bit version  
http://  
www.microsoft.com/  
downloads/en/  
details.aspx?  
FamilyID=3ee91fc2-  
a9bc-4ee1-  
aca3-2a9aff5915ea  
64 bit version  
ꢀ
http://  
www.microsoft.com/  
downloads/en/  
details.aspx?  
FamilyID=73f766dd-  
7127-4445-  
b860-47084587155f  
133  
Connecting External  
Monitor  
ꢀ
To output live or playback video images and  
audio sound to an external monitor, select the  
output signals from the camera recorder, and  
connect using an appropriate cable according to  
the monitor to be used.  
DEVICE  
B
A
T
T
.
R
E
LE  
A
S
E
UX  
A
AV  
A
P
/C  
O
W
ER  
G
H
D
E
V
IC  
E
A
V
B
H
D
M
I
ꢀ
ꢀ
Choose the most suitable terminal according to  
the monitor in use.  
R
E
M
O
T
E
D
C
REMOTE  
HT  
[HD/SD SDI] terminal:  
DC  
Clamp Filter  
(supplied)  
Outputs either the HD-SDI signal or SD-SDI  
signal.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
[AV] terminal:  
Outputs composite video and audio signals.  
[HDMI] terminal:  
Outputs HDMI signals.  
Wire Clamp  
(supplied)  
Configure the settings in the [A/V Set] menu to  
match the monitor to be connected.  
(' P106 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When [Network] is set to “On(HDMI Off)” or  
“On(SDI Off)”, either HDMI signal or SDI signal  
is output.  
SDI IN  
HDMI  
AV input  
.
* Select the display pattern in [A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[HDMI/SDI Out].  
(' P106 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )  
*
When [Record Format]ꢀ ꢀ[System] is set to “SD”,  
-
only SD-SDI signals are output.  
(' P111 [ System ] )  
* To display the menu screen or display screen on  
an external monitor, set [A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Video Set]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Display On TV] to “On”.  
(' P106 [ Display On TV ] )  
134  
Connecting via SDI  
Connecting the  
Headphone  
ꢀ
Digital video signals, together with embedded  
(superimposed) audio signals and time code  
signals, are output for both the HD-SDI and SD-  
SDI signals.  
ꢀ
Audio output from the [+] terminal can be  
ꢀ
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD SDI] output  
terminal is used as a flag to determine valid  
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will  
not be output.  
selected using [A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Monitor] or the  
[MONITOR] selection switch on the camera  
recorder.  
(' P109 [ Monitor ] )  
ꢀ
The different combinations of settings that are  
output from the [+] terminal and monitor  
speaker are as follows.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
The sampling frequency for embedded  
(superimposed) audio signals is 48 kHz. Time  
code of the built-in time generator as well as  
playback time code are also output.  
[+]  
[MONITOR]  
Switch  
[Monitor]  
Settings  
terminal  
Speaker *  
CH1  
Settings  
L
R
[CH1]  
[BOTH]  
-
[Mix]  
[Stereo]  
-
CH1  
Settings for SDI Down-Converted Output  
CH1+CH2 CH1+CH2  
CH1 CH2  
ꢀ
You can select the method to “down convert” HD  
video images to SD images during SD-SDI  
output.  
[CH2]  
CH2  
CH2  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Set using [A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Video Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[SD  
Aspect].  
* Audio is output from the speaker only in Media  
mode. Does not output in the Camera mode.  
The available modes include “Side Cut”, “Letter”  
(blackened at the top and bottom), and  
“Squeeze” (full size, compressed at the left and  
right).  
I
(' P112 [ SD Aspect ] )  
X
U
A
P
/C  
O
W
G
E
R
Memo :  
H
BA  
TT  
.R  
EL  
EA  
SE  
X
AU  
A
P
/C  
O
W
E
R
HG  
ꢀ
When [Record Format]ꢀ ꢀ[System] is set to “SD”,  
-
and [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item cannot be  
selected.  
D
E
V
IC  
E
A
V
H
D/S  
SD  
D
I
B
H
D
MI  
R
E
M
O
T
E
(' P111 [ System ] )  
HOS  
T
D
C
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
If both CH1 and CH2 are built-in microphones,  
stereo sound is output from the [+] terminal  
regardless of the [MONITOR] switch setting and  
[Monitor] setting.  
135  
Connecting Wired Remote Functions of Network  
Control  
Connection  
ꢀ
The functions of the camera recorder can be  
The network function can be operated by  
connecting one of the following adapters to the  
rear [HOST] terminal.  
configured using a wired remote control.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
USB wireless LAN adapter  
ꢀ
When the switches of the camera recorder and  
remote control unit are operated at the same  
time, the switch operation of the remote control  
unit takes priority over that of the camera  
recorder.  
ꢀ
USB-Ethernet adapter  
ꢀ
USB-Cellular adapter  
(' P137 [Camera Setup for Network  
Connection] )  
ꢀ
The network feature comes with a browser-  
based function that makes use of devices such  
as smartphones, tablet terminals, and PCs, as  
well as an FTP function for executing operations  
on the thumbnail screen or menu.  
ꢀ
Connect a wired remote control to the  
camera recorder.  
Connect the wired remote control (sold  
separately) to the [REMOTE] terminal of this  
camera recorder.  
List of Functions  
Importing Metadata  
You can download a metadata settings file (XML  
format) from the FTP server and store metadata in  
the camera recorder.  
1
T
U
P
IN  
2
T
U
P
IN  
BA  
TT  
.R  
EL  
EA  
SE  
X
AU  
(' P140 [Importing Metadata] )  
A
P
/C  
O
W
G
E
R
H
R
E
C
D
E
V
IC  
E
Uploading Recorded Clips  
A
HD  
SD  
V
/S  
D
I
B
H
D
MI  
R
E
M
You can upload clips recorded in the SD card to a  
preset FTP server.  
O
T
E
Connect the wired  
remote control  
D
C
(' P142 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip] )  
REMOTE  
.
Editing Metadata  
Caution :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Planning Metadata  
ꢀ
Turn off the power of the camera recorder when  
You can access the page for editing the camera  
recorder’s metadata via a browser on devices  
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC,  
and edit the metadata that is to be applied to  
clips to be recorded.  
connecting a wired remote control.  
ꢁ
Turn on the power of the camera recorder.  
(' P145 [ Planning Metadata ] )  
Clip Metadata  
You can access the page for editing the camera  
recorder’s metadata via a browser on devices  
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC,  
and display or rewrite the metadata that is  
recorded to a clip.  
(' P146 [ Clip Metadata ] )  
View Remote  
You can access via a browser on devices such as  
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check the  
live image or remotely control the camera.  
(' P148 [View Remote Feature] )  
136  
Camera Setup for Network Connection  
Preparing Network  
Connection  
ꢀ
Connect an appropriate adapter according  
to the intended use to the [HOST] terminal  
at the rear of the camera recorder.  
Operating Environment  
The following adapters can be connected.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
USB wireless LAN adapter  
USB-Ethernet adapter  
USB-Cellular adapter  
Computer  
oꢀCPU  
Core 2 Duo 2.4 GHz or higher  
oꢀMemory  
2 GB or higher  
oꢀDisplay  
1
T
U
P
IN  
2
T
U
P
IN  
1024x768 or higher  
oꢀOS  
BA  
TT  
.R  
EL  
EA  
SE  
X
AU  
A
P
/C  
O
W
G
E
R
H
R
EC  
ꢀ
Windows XP SP3/Windows Vista SP2 (32 bit/64  
bit)/Windows7 SP1 (32 bit/64 bit)  
Mac OS X v10.5 or later  
DE  
V
IC  
E
A
V
HD  
SD  
/S  
D
I
B
H
D
M
I
ꢀ
R
E
M
O
T
E
HO  
ST  
oꢀWeb Browser  
D
C
HOST  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Internet Explorer 8 or later  
Safari 5.1 or later  
HOST  
Google Chrome 21.0 or later  
Mozilla Firefox 15 or later  
Connect an appropriate adapter  
Smartphone/Tablet Terminal  
.
Memo :  
oꢀiPhone/iPad/iPod touch  
iOS 5.1.1 or later (Safari 5.1 or later)  
oꢀAndroid Smartphone  
ꢀ
Only a network connection adapter can be  
connected to the [HOST] terminal.  
Connect or disconnect an adapter only after you  
have turned off the power of the camera  
recorder.  
ꢀ
Android 4.0 or later (standard browser)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
You can find the latest information on the  
compatible adapters at the product page of our  
website.  
Two types of network coverage (WAN and LAN)  
are available for each application.  
ꢁ
Enable the network connection.  
Set [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Network] to  
“On(HDMI Off)” or “On(SDI Off)”.  
ꢂ
Configure the connection settings.  
ꢀ
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Connection  
Setup]ꢀ-ꢀ[Wizard] and press the Set button  
(R).  
ꢀ
A wizard screen appears according to the  
type of adapter connected. Follow the  
instructions on the screen to perform setting.  
(' P138 [Connecting via Wireless LAN] )  
(' P139 [Connecting via Wired LAN] )  
(' P140 [Connecting via 3G Adapter] )  
137  
P2P Connection  
Connecting via Wireless LAN  
Connection via Access Point  
You can access the web function of this camera  
recorder from devices such as a smartphone,  
tablet terminal, or PC.  
ꢀ
Perform setting on the camera recorder,  
and start up the [Wizard] screen.  
(' P137 [Camera Setup for Network  
Connection] )  
ꢀ
[Wireless LAN] appears on the [Wizard]  
screen.  
ꢁ
[Wireless LAN] appears on the [Wizard]  
screen.  
.
ꢁ
Press the I button to display the [Select  
Connection Type] screen.  
Select “P2P”.  
.
ꢂ
Press the I button to display the [Select  
Connection Type] screen.  
Follow the screen instructions to complete  
setting.  
Perform setting for the following.  
Select “Connect with Access Point”.  
Follow the screen instructions to complete  
setting. Perform setting for the following.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Mode of connection  
Method of setting  
* SSID and Passphrase in cases other than  
WPS  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Mode of connection  
Method of setting  
* SSID, type of encryption, Passphrase, and  
IP Address setting (“DHCP” or “Manual”) in  
cases other than WPS  
2
3
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
When “WPS” is selected in the [Select Setup  
Type] screen, the following steps 3 and 4 are not  
required.  
.
ꢃ
Setting is complete.  
After setting is complete, you can access the  
camera recorder via a browser.  
(' P144 [Connecting via a Browser] )  
ꢂ
Set the camera recorder to the Camera  
mode, and display the [Network] (status)  
screen.  
ꢀ
Press the [STATUS] button on the camera  
recorder to display the status screen.  
Press the cross-shaped button (HI) to  
display the [Network] screen.  
Check to ensure that the [SSID] and  
[Passphrase] that you have set in the wizard  
are displayed.  
ꢀ
138  
Connecting via Wired LAN  
You can connect a device such as a smartphone,  
tablet terminal, or PC directly to the camera  
recorder using a cross cable to access the camera  
recorder’s web functions.  
ꢀ
Connect the [HOST] terminal on the camera  
recorder to the smartphone, tablet  
terminal, PC, etc. using a cross cable.  
ꢁ
Perform setting on the camera recorder,  
and start up the [Wizard] screen.  
(' P137 [Camera Setup for Network  
Connection] )  
.
ꢃ
Select [SSID] from the list of access points  
(smartphone, tablet terminal, PC, etc.), and  
enter [Passphrase].  
ꢂ
[Ethernet] appears on the [Wizard] screen.  
ꢀ
Display the list of access points in the  
wireless connection settings of the  
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and  
select “HM650-*****”. (The “*****” portion  
varies according to the device.)  
ꢀ
After the password confirmation screen  
appears, enter the [Passphrase] displayed  
on the [Network] screen.  
.
ꢃ
Press the I button to display the [IP  
Address Configuration] screen.  
Follow the screen instructions to complete  
setting. Perform setting for the following.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
IP address setting (DHCP or manual)  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway  
DNS Server  
.
.
ꢄ
Setting is complete.  
ꢄ
Setting is complete.  
After setting is complete, you can access the  
camera recorder via a browser.  
(' P144 [Connecting via a Browser] )  
After setting is complete, you can access the  
camera recorder via a browser.  
(' P144 [Connecting via a Browser] )  
139  
Connecting via 3G Adapter  
You can make use of the FTP function by  
connecting a USB-Cellular adapter to this camera  
recorder.  
Importing Metadata  
You can download a metadata settings file (XML  
format) from the FTP server and store metadata in  
the camera recorder.  
ꢀ
Connect the USB-Cellular adapter to the  
[HOST] terminal of the camera recorder.  
Preparing Metadata  
ꢁ
Perform setting on the camera recorder,  
and start up the [Wizard] screen.  
(' P137 [Camera Setup for Network  
Connection] )  
ꢀ
You can record one of the four metadata types  
below.  
Title1  
:
:
:
:
Not more than 63 characters  
Not more than 127 characters  
Not more than 127 characters  
Not more than 2047 characters  
Title2  
ꢂ
[Cellular] appears on the [Wizard] screen.  
Creator  
Description  
ꢀ
Only ASCII characters (single-byte  
alphanumeric characters and symbols) are  
usable.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Metadata makes use of the XML description  
format.  
Edit the  
<Title1><Title2><Description><Creator> tag  
element using the XML editor. (Indicated by the  
frames below)  
.
ꢃ
Press the I button to display the [Select  
Carrier] screen.  
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>  
<NRT-MetaInterface lastUpdate="2012-07-26T18:06:21+09:00"  
xmlns="urn:schemas-proHD:nonRealTimeMetaInterface:ver.1.00"  
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">  
<MetaData>  
<Title1>Title1 sample</Title1>  
<!-- only "en",max63bytes -->  
<Title2>Title2 sample</Title2>  
<!-- only "en",max127bytes -->  
Follow the screen instructions to complete  
setting. Perform setting for the following.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Carrier selection  
Access point  
Connection phone number  
User name  
<Description>Description sample</Description>  
<!-- only "en",max2047bytes -->  
<Creator>Creator sample</Creator>  
<!-- only "en",max127bytes -->  
</MetaData>  
</NRT-MetaInterface>  
.
ꢀ
.
Caution :  
ꢀ
You can access the web functions via a browser  
on devices such as a smartphone, tablet  
terminal, or PC only in a LAN environment.  
Note that you may have to pay very high bills in  
the case of pay-per-use contracts. Fixed price  
contract is recommended if you are using the  
network function.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Note that you may have to pay very high bills if  
the APN is incorrectly set. Make sure that the  
setting is correct.  
There may be communication even when you  
are not using the network function.  
Remove the adapter when the function is not in  
use.  
140  
Configuring the Server for Downloading  
Importing Metadata  
For specifying the settings for connecting to the  
FTP server for downloading the metadata (domain  
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the  
path of the file to download.  
Download the metadata settings file (XML format)  
from the FTP server.  
ꢀ
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Import Metadata] and press  
the Set button (R).  
ꢀ
Open the [Metadata Server] screen.  
Open the [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Metadata Server]  
screen.  
The [Import Metadata] screen appears.  
.
ꢁ
Select the server for importing the  
metadata.  
.
ꢁ
Register the [Metadata Server].  
ꢀ
The name that is registered in [Metadata  
Server]ꢀ-ꢀ[Alias] is displayed.  
ꢀ
Select a server using the cross-shaped  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
The server settings screen appears. Perform  
setting for each item.  
ꢀ
Select a server using the cross-shaped  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
ꢀ
Up to 4 settings can be registered.  
(' P115 [ Metadata Server ] )  
2
.
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
For details on the registered information, please  
consult the network administrator for the server.  
141  
ꢂ
Select [Import] on the confirmation screen,  
and press the Set button (R).  
Import starts.  
Uploading a Recorded  
Video Clip  
After import is complete, the display is restored  
to the screen before the [Import Metadata]  
screen appears.  
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset  
FTP server.  
Configuring the FTP Server for  
Uploading  
For specifying the settings for connecting to the  
FTP server to upload recorded clips to (domain  
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the  
directory of the upload destination.  
3
ꢀ
Open the [Clip Server] screen.  
Open the [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Clip Server] screen.  
.
Memo :  
.
ꢀ
You cannot exit the menu or perform recording  
ꢁ
Register the [Clip Server].  
Register the server to upload recorded clips in  
the SD card to.  
while import is in progress.  
ꢀ
If import of the metadata failed, “Import Error!” is  
displayed, and a message indicating the cause  
of the error appears.  
Up to 4 servers can be registered.  
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )  
Press the Set button (R) to return to the [Import  
Metadata] screen in step 1.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
For details on the registered information, please  
(' P159 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )  
consult the network administrator for the server.  
Uploading Video Clip  
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset  
FTP server.  
All playable clips on the thumbnail screen can be  
uploaded.  
Uploading a Video Clip  
ꢀ
Set the camera recorder to the Media mode.  
ꢀ
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button  
in Camera mode to enter Media mode. A  
thumbnail screen of the clips recorded on the  
SD card is displayed.  
ꢀ
You can upload the selected clips on the  
thumbnail screen to the FTP server.  
(' P82 [Thumbnail Screen] )  
142  
ꢁ
ꢄ
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded.  
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded using  
the cross-shaped button (JKHꢀI).  
Upload is complete.  
ꢀ
After upload is complete, “Successfully  
Completed.” appears on the screen.  
Press the Set button (R) to return to the  
thumbnail screen.  
ꢀ
2
.
ꢂ
5
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.  
The action selection screen is displayed.  
.
Selecting and Uploading Multiple Clips  
To select and upload multiple clips, refer to  
“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple  
Clips] P 89”.  
3
Uploading All Video Clips  
ꢀ
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.  
.
The action selection screen is displayed.  
ꢃ
Select [FTP Upload]ꢀ-ꢀ[This Clip]ꢀ- server  
to upload to, and press the Set button (R).  
The status of the transfer process is indicated  
by a progress bar.  
ꢁ
Upload the clips.  
Select [FTP Upload...]ꢀ-ꢀ[All Clips]ꢀ- server to  
upload to, and press the Set button (R).  
2
.
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
The options for the server to upload files to are  
indicated using the preset names in [Clip  
Server]ꢀ-ꢀ[Alias].  
ꢀ
To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).  
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and  
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and  
return to the thumbnail screen.  
ꢀ
When uploading starts, the [MODE] selection  
button is disabled until uploading is completed  
or stopped.  
143  
ꢂ
Upload starts.  
Connecting via a Browser  
The status of the transfer process is indicated  
by a progress bar.  
You can access the web functions of this camera  
recorder via a browser on devices such as a  
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.  
Make the necessary preparations for connection in  
advance.  
(' P137 [Connect an appropriate adapter  
according to the intended use to the [HOST]  
terminal at the rear of the camera recorder.] )  
ꢀ
Set the camera recorder to the Camera  
mode, and display the [Network] (status)  
screen.  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
Press the [STATUS] button on the camera  
recorder to display the status screen.  
Press the cross-shaped button (HI) to  
display the [Network] screen.  
ꢀ
To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).  
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and  
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and  
return to the thumbnail screen.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Check the displayed [IP Address].  
If the file to be uploaded has the same file as an  
existing file in the FTP server, an overwrite  
confirmation window appears.  
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP  
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,  
the overwrite confirmation window will not be  
displayed and the existing file is overwritten.  
ꢃ
Upload is complete.  
ꢀ
After all clips are uploaded successfully,  
“Successfully Completed.” is displayed.  
Press the Set button (R) to return to the  
thumbnail screen.  
.
ꢁ
Start up the browser on the terminal you  
wish to connect to the camera recorder,  
and enter the [IP Address].  
ꢀ
When clips are not uploaded successfully,  
the following errors are displayed.  
(Example: 192.168.0.1)  
If “192.168.0.1” is displayed in [IP Address],  
enter “http://192.168.0.1”.  
Cause of Error  
http://192.168.0.1  
.
(' P159 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )  
.
144  
ꢂ
Enter the user name and password.  
Enter the user name (prohd) and the password  
(initial password:ꢀ0000) on the login screen to  
display the main page of the camera.  
Editing Metadata  
You can create the metadata to be inserted into a  
recorded file, or rewrite the metadata of a recorded  
clip.  
Planning Metadata  
You can access the page for editing the camera  
recorder’s metadata via a browser on devices such  
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and edit  
the metadata that is to be applied to clips to be  
recorded.  
ꢀ
Access the main page of the camera.  
Access the page from a device such as a  
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.  
(' P144 [Connecting via a Browser] )  
ꢁ
Tap (click) the [Planning Metadata] tab to  
open the [Planning Metadata] screen.  
2
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
The password can be altered in [Main Menu]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Web]ꢀ-  
ꢀ[Change Password].  
.
(' P115 [ Change Password ] )  
145  
Clip Metadata  
ꢂ
Editing Metadata  
You can access the page for editing the metadata  
via a browser on devices such as a smartphone,  
tablet terminal, or PC, and display or rewrite the  
metadata that is recorded to a clip.  
A
B
Enter information for the necessary fields.  
After input is complete, tap (click) [Save] to  
overwrite the metadata.  
ꢀ
Access the main page of the camera.  
Access the page from a device such as a  
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.  
A
B
(' P144 [Connecting via a Browser] )  
ꢁ
Tap (click) the [Clip Metadata] tab to start  
up the [Clip Metadata].  
2
Keyboard  
.
ꢃ
Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Update of the [Planning Metadata] starts.  
After update is complete, “Renewal of  
planning metadata is succeeded.” is  
displayed. Tap (click) [OK].  
.
ꢂ
Set the camera recorder to the “Remote  
Edit Mode”.  
ꢀ
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” appears on  
the display screen of the camera recorder.  
Select[Change]andpresstheSetbutton(R)  
to switch to the Remote Edit Mode.  
ꢀ
Returns to the screen in step 3.  
ꢀ
3
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
If update failed, “Renewal of planning metadata  
is succeeded.” is displayed.  
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step  
3.  
.
146  
ꢄ
A
Editing the Metadata of Selected Clips  
Edit the information for the necessary fields.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the menu or status is displayed, display  
of the confirmation screen will be put on hold.  
If the menu is displayed on the camera recorder,  
close the menu.  
ꢀ
If you are using a PC, input using the mouse  
and keyboard.  
ꢀ
If you are using a smartphone or tablet  
terminal, tap the text input area to display a  
standard software keyboard on the screen.  
Enter the information using the displayed  
keyboard.  
If the status is displayed on the camera recorder,  
close the status display.  
Pressing the Set button (R) on the camera  
recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode ends  
the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and switches to  
the Camera mode.  
B
C
You can tap (click) [OK Mark] to add an OK mark  
to or delete it from selected clips.  
After editing is complete, tap (click) [Save] to  
overwrite the metadata.  
ꢃ
Select the clip to rewrite the metadata.  
ꢀ
A list of recorded clips appears on the [Clip  
Metadata] screen.  
ꢀ
Tap (click) the clip for which you want to  
rewrite the metadata.  
A
B
C
Keyboard  
.
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot  
A] and [Slot B] tabs.  
You can jump through the displayed clips  
backward or forward by 30 clips each using the  
[↑-30] and [↓+30] tabs.  
ꢀ
147  
ꢅ
Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.  
View Remote Feature  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Update of the metadata starts.  
After update is complete, “Renewal of clip  
metadata is succeeded.” is displayed. Tap  
(click) [OK].  
You can access via a browser on devices such as  
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check the  
live image and perform the following remote control  
operations.  
ꢀ
Returns to the screen in step 4.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Start/stop recording  
Zooming  
Register/delete preset zoom  
ꢀ
Access the main page of the camera.  
Access the page from a device such as a  
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.  
(' P144 [Connecting via a Browser] )  
ꢁ
Tap (click) the [View Remote] tab to open  
the [View Remote] screen.  
.
Memo :  
ꢀ
If update failed, “Renewal of clip metadata is  
2
failed.” is displayed.  
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step  
4.  
.
Operating Procedure  
A
01:12:54.19  
Z 00  
ProHD  
B
C
D
26min  
50min  
STBY  
I
H
282min  
E
F
G
.
148  
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom  
A
B
Page Switch Tab  
Tap (click) this tab to move to the [Planning  
Metadata], [Clip Metadata], or [Settings]  
screen.  
Registering Preset Zoom  
You can register any 3 zoom positions.  
Live View Screen  
ꢀ
Set to the Register Preset Zoom mode.  
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to switch to the  
Register Preset Zoom mode.  
Displays the live images.  
Tap a live image to display or hide information  
that is displayed on the live image, such as  
remaining space on the media and time code.  
C
D
[Clear] Button  
01:12:54.19  
Z 00  
ProHD  
Switches to the Delete Preset Zoom Position  
mode.  
(' P149 [Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom] )  
(' P150 [Deleting a Preset Zoom] )  
26min  
50min  
STBY  
[Preset] Button  
282min  
Switches to the Register Preset Zoom Position  
mode.  
(' P149 [Registering Preset Zoom] )  
E
F
[A]/[B]/[C] Buttons  
Use these buttons to perform preset registration  
or delete a preset data.  
Zoom Control  
.
ꢀ
Operate the zoom function by dragging the  
zoom button along the sliding bar.  
Tap (click) the [Wide] or [Tele] button to fine-  
tune the zoom position.  
ꢁ
Determine the zoom position.  
Use the zoom control to operate the zoom and  
determine a position.  
Tap (click) [A].  
Position [A] is registered, and position A is  
displayed on the sliding bar of the zoom control.  
ꢀ
ꢂ
G
Function Lock Button  
Locks the functions that have been set on the  
[Settings] screen.  
(' P152 [Changing View Remote Function  
Settings] )  
01:12:54.19  
Z 00  
ProHD  
Icon  
Description  
Locked  
.
Not locked  
26min  
50min  
STBY  
.
282min  
H
I
Stop Record Button  
Start Record Button  
.
149  
Deleting a Preset Zoom  
ꢃ
In the same way, register [B] and [C].  
After all three positions A, B and C are  
registered, the positions of the [A], [B], and [C]  
buttons will be rearranged according to the  
order of the registered zoom position from the  
left.  
ꢀ
Set to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.  
When any of positions [A], [B], and [C] are  
registered, tapping (clicking) the [Clear] button  
switches to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.  
01:12:54.19  
Z 00  
ProHD  
01:12:54.19  
Z 00  
ProHD  
26min  
50min  
STBY  
26min  
50min  
STBY  
282min  
282min  
.
.
ꢁ
Tap (click) the [A], [B], or [C] button that  
corresponds to the position you want to  
delete.  
ꢄ
Cancel the Register Preset Zoom mode.  
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to cancel the  
Register Preset Zoom mode.  
ꢀ
The position is deleted, and the button is  
grayed out.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The corresponding zoom position mark on  
the sliding bar also disappears.  
After registration is complete ([A], [B], and [C]  
buttons are all active), tapping (clicking) each  
button switches to the corresponding preset  
zoom position.  
01:12:54.19  
Z 00  
ProHD  
ꢀ
This function operates independently of the  
preset zoom position on the camera recorder.  
(' P48 [Saving/Recalling Current Zoom  
Position (Preset Zoom)] )  
26min  
50min  
STBY  
282min  
Grayed out  
Position mark  
disappears  
.
ꢂ
Cancel the Delete Preset Zoom mode.  
Tap (click) the [Clear] button to cancel the  
Delete Preset Zoom mode.  
ꢀ
The Clip Review function of the camera  
recorder is unavailable during View Remote  
operation.  
(' P71 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately  
(Clip Review)] )  
150  
Configuring Settings via a  
Browser  
You can change the network-related settings by  
accessing via a browser on devices such as a  
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.  
A
B
View Remote  
Settings for operations on the View Remote.  
Connection Setup  
Settings related to the network.  
You can change the settings for each of the  
preset items on the [Wizard] screen of the  
camera recorder.  
ꢀ
Access the main page of the camera.  
Access the page from a device such as a  
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.  
C
Metadata Server  
Settings on the server for importing the  
metadata.  
(' P144 [Connecting via a Browser] )  
Setting can be performed in the same way as  
the Metadata Server menu on the camera  
recorder.  
ꢁ
Tap (click) the [Settings] tab.  
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of  
whether they are specified via the camera  
recorder or web operation.  
2
D
Clip Server  
Settings for the server to upload recorded clips  
to.  
Setting can be performed in the same way as  
the [Clip Server] menu on the camera recorder.  
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of  
whether they are specified via the camera  
recorder or web operation.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
Priority is given to menu operation on the  
camera recorder.  
ꢀ
When the menu on the camera recorder is  
opened while the [Settings] screen is opened  
using the browser, a warning appears, after  
which the display returns to the main screen.  
While the menu is displayed on the camera  
recorder, the [Settings] screen cannot be  
opened via the browser.  
.
ꢂ
Open the [Settings] screen.  
Set each of the items as follows.  
ꢀ
A
B
C
D
.
151  
Changing View Remote Function  
Settings  
Changing Connection Setup  
You can change the settings for each of the preset  
items on the [Wizard] screen of the camera  
recorder.  
For performing setting for using the View Remote  
function.  
ꢀ
If all the items cannot be displayed in a single  
page, scroll down to display the remaining  
items.  
ꢀ
Items that cannot be changed are grayed out  
according to the type of adapter connected and  
the mode of connection.  
A
B
A
B
C
C
D
.
A
[Camera Name]  
ꢀ
For setting the name that appears at the top  
left of the view screen.  
.
ꢀ
Tapping the text input area displays a  
software keyboard.  
A
B
C
Type of Adapter Connected  
Mode of Wireless LAN Connection  
If you are using a PC, enter using the PC  
keyboard.  
[Search Access Point] Button  
Tap (click) to display a list of the detected  
access points.  
ꢀ
BytappingtheGokeyafterinputiscomplete,  
the software keyboard disappears.  
The currently selected access point is indicated  
by a dot mark (ꢀꢀꢀ).  
B
[Restrictions]  
For setting the buttons to be disabled on the  
View screen while in the locked mode.  
ꢀ
[REC]:  
For setting whether to disable the Stop  
Record button or zoom operation during  
recording.  
Tap (click) each item to switch between  
[Unlock] and [Lock].  
[Except REC]:  
ꢀ
For setting whether to disable the Stop  
Record button or zoom operation in any  
mode other than the recording mode.  
Tap (click) each item to switch between  
[Unlock] and [Lock].  
C
[OK]/[Cancel]  
Tap (click) [OK] to save the settings.  
Tap (click) [Cancel] to stop setting and return to  
the main [Settings] screen.  
.
152  
Changing Metadata Server Settings  
D
Settings on the [Select Setup Type] Screen  
You can make direct changes to the FTP server for  
importing the metadata set in [Metadata Server] on  
thecamerarecorder, orthepathofthefiletoimport.  
E
A
.
E
Settings on the [IP Address Configuration]  
Screen  
When “DHCP” is selected, all items will be  
grayed out.  
F
B
G
H
.
A
FTP Server for Importing the Metadata  
The registered FTP server name (name that is  
set in Alias) is displayed.  
.
B
Settings Specified in [Metadata Server]  
F
G
H
Settings during Use of a 3G Connection Adapter  
Settings on the [Select FTP Proxy] Screen  
Settings specified in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Metadata Server]  
[OK]/[Cancel] Button  
are displayed.  
(' P115 [ Metadata Server ] )  
After changing of settings is complete, tap  
(click) the [OK] button.  
On the confirmation screen, tap (click)  
[Execute] to change the settings on the camera  
ꢀ
recorder and restart the network.  
ꢀ
153  
Changing Clip Server Settings  
Managing the Network  
Connection Settings File  
You can make direct changes to the server and  
directory settings that are specified in [Clip  
Server] on the camera recorder for uploading  
recorded clips in the SD card to the FTP server.  
This camera recorder allows you to save the  
network connection settings on the Wizard screen  
to the camera recorder unit.  
Loading a saved connecting settings file enables  
you to reproduce the appropriate network  
connection state speedily.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
To save or load the connection settings, go to  
[Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Connection Setup].  
A
ꢀ
The following operations can be performed on  
the [Connection Setup] menu.  
ꢀ
[Saving the Connection Settings File] P 155  
ꢀ
[Reading the Connection Settings  
File] P 156  
ꢀ
[Deleting Connection Settings] P 156  
Number of Storable Setup Files  
Camera recorder  
:
[CAM1] to [CAM4]  
ꢀ
B
.
A
FTP Server to Upload Recorded Clips To  
The registered FTP server name (name that is  
set in Alias) is displayed.  
Settings Specified in [Clip Server]  
B
Settings specified in [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ  
-ꢀ[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Clip Server] are  
displayed.  
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )  
154  
Saving the Connection Settings File  
ꢄ
Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).  
ꢀ
ꢁ
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Connection  
Setup] and press the Set button (R).  
Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).  
4
5
.
2
ꢅ
Save the file.  
ꢀ
A confirmation screen appears when you  
choose to overwrite.  
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation  
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving  
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the  
screen.  
.
ꢂ
Select the file to be newly saved (or  
overwritten) using the cross-shaped  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
6
3
.
ꢀ
Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the  
screen when the file is newly saved.  
.
ꢃ
Name the file.  
Enter the subname using the software  
keyboard.  
(' P93 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )  
Memo :  
ꢀ
When overwriting an existing file, the subname  
of the existing file is displayed.  
ꢀ
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or  
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the  
previous screen.  
.
ꢆ
Saving is complete.  
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”  
appears on the screen, and the menu screen  
closes automatically.  
155  
Reading the Connection Settings File  
Deleting Connection Settings  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢁ
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Connection  
Setup] and press the Set button (R).  
Select [Main Menu]ꢀ-ꢀ[System]ꢀ-ꢀ  
[Network]ꢀ-ꢀ[Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[Connection  
Setup] and press the Set button (R).  
Select [Delete] and press the Set button  
(R).  
Select [Load] and press the Set button (R).  
2
2
.
.
ꢂ
Select the file to read using the cross-  
shaped button (JK), and press the Set  
button (R).  
ꢂ
Select the file to delete using the cross-  
shaped button (JK), and press the Set  
button (R).  
3
3
.
.
ꢃ
Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,  
and press the Set button (R).  
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the  
screen.  
ꢃ
Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,  
and press the Set button (R).  
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the  
screen.  
4
4
.
.
ꢄ
Reading is complete.  
ꢄ
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”  
appears on the screen, and the menu screen  
closes automatically.  
Deletion is complete.  
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”  
appears on the screen.  
156  
Error Messages and Actions  
Warning display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen, tally lamp indication and warning tone are as  
follows according to the error status.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may  
prevent it from functioning properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder  
again.  
ꢀ
Error Message  
Thumbnail  
Display Screen  
Status  
Action  
Screen  
Dedicated  
Screen  
TURN POWER  
OFF  
-
System error.  
Turn off the power, and turn it  
on again.  
* The warning tone sounds and the  
tally lamp blinks twice every  
second.  
TURN BACK ON  
LATER  
If the error persists, consult  
your nearest JVC dealer.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
FAN STOP  
DETECTED  
PLEASE TURN  
P.OFF  
-
-
The fan stopped running.  
The power turns off  
automatically after about 1  
second.  
Please consult your nearest  
JVC dealer.  
FAN  
Usage time of the fan has exceeded Check the fan and replace  
MAINTENANCE  
REQUIRED  
9000 hours.  
accordingly. For more details,  
please consult your nearest  
JVC dealer.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can check the usage  
time of the fan in  
[System]ꢀ-ꢀ[System  
Information]ꢀ-ꢀ[Fan  
Hour].  
(' P111 [ Fan Hour ] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
－
Getting  
Overheated.　  
Please Turn  
Power Off.  
The battery has exceeded the  
specified temperature.  
The power turns off  
Wait until the temperature  
drops or replace the  
battery.  
ꢀ
automatically after about 15  
second.  
If the error persists,  
consult your nearest JVC  
dealer.  
REC INHIBITED  
－
[REC] button is pressed when the Turn off the write-protect  
switch of the SD card, or  
insert a recordable SD card.  
(' P39 [SD Card] )  
write-protect switch of the SD card  
is set.  
157  
Error Message  
Thumbnail  
Status  
Action  
Screen  
Dedicated  
Screen  
Display Screen  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LOST MEDIA  
INFO [*]  
－
Card is removed while recording Restore the card using this  
is in progress.  
camera recorder.  
(' P42 [Restoring the SD  
Card] )  
Card is removed while  
formatting is in progress.  
Card is removed while restoring  
is in progress.  
Card is removed while adding  
the OK mark.  
Card is removed while writing a  
setup file.  
Card is removed while deleting a  
clip.  
(*: A, B)  
ꢀ
RECORD  
FORMAT  
-
Video format of the file for Clip Set [ꢂResolution] and  
Review is different from the  
current [ꢂResolution] and  
[ꢂFrame & Bit Rate] setting.  
[ꢂFrame & Bit Rate]  
correctly.  
INCORRECT  
(' P111 [ ꢂ Resolution ] )  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit  
Rate ] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
MEDIA FULL  
NO CLIPS  
-
-
[REC] button is pressed when Replace the SD card with a  
new one.  
the media in use has no  
remaining space.  
Remaining space ran out during  
recording.  
No viewable clips are found on the Insert an SD card that  
card for Clip Review.  
contains clips that can be  
reviewed.  
(' P39 [SD Card] )  
(' P71 [Viewing Recorded  
Videos Immediately (Clip  
Review)] )  
NO MEDIA  
-
[REC] button is pressed when an SD Insert an SD card.  
(' P39 [SD Card] )  
card is not inserted.  
-
No Media  
No SD card is found in Media mode Insert an SD card.  
or when the thumbnail screen is  
displayed.  
(' P39 [SD Card] )  
-
No Clips  
No clips are found on the inserted Insert an SD card that  
SD card in Media mode or when the contains playable clips.  
thumbnail screen is displayed.  
(' P39 [SD Card] )  
(' P82 [Playing Recorded  
Clips] )  
－
12h Continuation The continuous recording time in  
To continue recording, press  
Record  
AVCHD mode exceeds 12 hours  
and recording stops automatically.  
the [REC] button again.  
ꢀ
158  
List of FTP Transfer Errors  
If the upload of a recorded clip or download of the metadata setup file (XML format) is not successfully  
completed, the following errors are displayed.  
Error message  
Timeout.  
Status  
Action  
Execute again.  
Use a different server.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Transfer was discontinued due to  
timeout caused by network  
transmission or server failure.  
Media Was Removed.  
Adapter Was Removed.  
SD card is removed while FTP  
Insert the SD card and execute FTP  
transfer again.  
Connect the USB network device.  
transfer is in progress.  
The USB network device is  
removed while FTP transfer is in  
progress.  
Cannot Connect to Server.  
UnabletoconnecttotheFTPserver. Adjust the Server and Port settings  
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip  
Server].  
(' P115 [ Metadata Server ] )  
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )  
Access Denied.  
Access is denied.  
Adjust the Server and Port settings  
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip  
Server].  
(' P115 [ Metadata Server ] )  
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )  
Invalid Username or  
Password.  
Authentication for login to the FTP Adjust the Username and Password  
server failed.  
settings for [Metadata Server] or  
[Clip Server].  
(' P115 [ Metadata Server ] )  
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )  
Invalid Path Was Requested. The path specified for the FTP  
server is incorrect.  
Adjust the [Clip Server] and [Dir.  
Path] settings for [Metadata  
Server] or [File Path].  
(' P115 [ Metadata Server ] )  
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )  
Server Error.  
There was an unintended operation Execute again.  
of the FTP server.  
Use a different server.  
Invalid Request.  
Invalid Data Size.  
A bad request is executed for the Execute again.  
FTP server.  
Invalid data size, such as a planning Adjust the planning metadata saved  
metadata size that exceeds 4 KB. in the [Metadata Server].  
(' P145 [ Planning Metadata ] )  
Invalid Data Format.  
The XML format of the planning  
Adjust the planning metadata saved  
metadata is invalid.  
in the [Metadata Server].  
(' P145 [ Planning Metadata ] )  
159  
Error message  
Transfer Error.  
Status  
Action  
Execute again.  
Transfer failed due to  
communication failure.  
Invalid URL.  
The path was deemed invalid by the Adjust the Server and Port settings  
FTP server.  
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip  
Server].  
(' P115 [ Metadata Server ] )  
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )  
Media Access Error.  
Reading/writing of the SD card  
failed while FTP transfer is in  
progress.  
Insert a different SD card.  
Internal Error.  
Other Error.  
An internal error has occurred while Adjust the settings and execute  
FTP transfer is in progress.  
again.  
An unknown error or other errors  
Adjust the settings and execute  
have occurred while FTP transfer is again.  
in progress.  
Media Read Error.  
Reading of the SD card failed while Insert a different SD card.  
FTP transfer is in progress.  
ꢀ
Tally Lamp  
The tally lamp start blinking when the remaining space on the SD card is running out during recording, or  
when the battery power is running low.  
Blinking Mode  
Remaining Battery Power/SD Card Space  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Blinks slowly  
Battery power is low  
(once every second)  
Remaining recording time on SD card is less than 3 minutes (during  
recording)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Blinks quickly  
Remaining recording time on SD card is zero (during recording)  
(2 times per second)  
Error on the camera recorder  
ꢀ
Warning Tone  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Warning tone is output from the monitor speaker and [+] terminal when the battery level is low.  
Warning tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.  
Memo :  
ꢀ
You can specify whether to turn on the warning tone as well as setting the volume in [A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Alarm Level].  
(' P109 [ Alarm Level ] )  
160  
Troubleshooting  
Symptom  
Power does not turn on.  
Action  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Is the AC adapter properly connected?  
Is the battery charged?  
Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off?  
Make sure to wait for an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning  
on the power again.  
Is the record trigger button/lock switch on the handle turned on?  
Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?  
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.  
(' P39 [Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card] )  
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?  
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.  
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Unable to start recording.  
ꢀ
Camera image is not output on Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?  
the LCD monitor and  
viewfinder screen.  
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.  
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )  
Playback does not start after Is the selected clip a playable clip?  
selecting a clip thumbnail and Playback is not possible if the clip has a different video format setting.  
pressing the Set button (R).  
No sound during playback.  
Is the currently played clip recorded in the Variable Frame Rec mode?  
(' P81 [Variable Frame Rec] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Images on the LCD monitor  
and viewfinder screen appear  
dark or blurred.  
Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
Is the [ND FILTER] switch set to “1/64”?  
Is the iris closed?  
Is the shutter speed setting too high?  
Is the amount of peaking too little? Use the [PEAKING +/-] button to  
adjust the contour for the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen.  
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor] )  
(' P37 [Adjusting the Viewfinder] )  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The[CH1/CH2]recordinglevel  
adjustment knob does not  
work.  
Is the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch set to “AUTO”?  
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to “ON”?  
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to “ON”, and [A/V Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio  
Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Audio On FULL AUTO] set to “Auto”?  
(' P109 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )  
SD card cannot be initialized Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?  
(formatted).  
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.  
(' P39 [Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card] )  
Battery alarm appears even Is the battery too old?  
after loading a charged  
battery.  
161  
Symptom  
Action  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The time code and user’s bit  
Even in Camera mode or Media mode, the time code and user’s bit  
may not be displayed depending to the type of display.  
Is [LCD/VF]ꢀ-ꢀ[Display Settings]ꢀ-ꢀ[TC/UB] set to “Off”? To display  
the time code and user’s bit, set it to “TC” or “UB”.  
(' P105 [ TC/UB ] )  
are not displayed.  
ꢀ
The date and time are not  
displayed.  
The date and time are only displayed on the Display 1 and Display 2  
screens in the Camera mode (during shooting).  
(' P120 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )  
Is [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Time Stamp] set to “On”? To display  
the date and time, set it to “Off”.  
ꢀ
(' P114 [ Time Stamp ] )  
Incorrect display on the  
viewfinder.  
Is the LCD monitor used with [LCD/VF]ꢀ  
(' P103 [LCD/VF Menu] )  
-ꢀ[LCD + VF] set to “Off”?  
ꢀ
The actual recording time is  
shorter than the estimated  
time.  
The recordable time may be shorter depending on the shooting  
conditions or the subject.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The two camera recorders are  
not synchronized even though  
the time codes have been  
synchronized. (ꢆ on the Slave  
device is not displayed.)  
Is the [TC IN/OUT] switch correctly set?  
(' P67 [Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera] )  
Set [System]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Set]ꢀ-ꢀ[Record Format]ꢀ-ꢀ[ꢂFrame & Bit  
Rate] such that the two camera recorders have the same frame rate.  
(' P112 [ ꢂ Frame & Bit Rate ] )  
ꢀ
Cannot connect to wireless  
LAN.  
Check the mode of connection and method of setting ([SSID] and  
[Passphrase] in cases other than WPS).  
(' P138 [Connecting via Wireless LAN] )  
ꢀ
Even if the Passphrase is wrong, “Completed the Setup Wizard.  
Please Input the Passphrase into Your Device.” may appear at the  
browser setting depending on the type of encryption.  
Adjust [Passphrase] again.  
ꢀ
The View Remote screen turns  
black.  
The network path is congested.  
Wait a while before refreshing (reloading) the web browser.  
The screen flickers.  
The screen freezes.  
Cannot perform remote  
operation.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The clips cannot be uploaded  
Adjust the [Clip Server] settings.  
to the FTP server.  
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )  
The maximum size of the recorded clip is 4 GB.  
If a file size limit has been set in the FTP server settings, set the size  
limit to more than 4 GB.  
ꢀ
Take necessary action as described in “[List of FTP Transfer  
Errors] P 159”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
The wireless LAN is  
disconnected.  
The wireless LAN may be disconnected depending on the  
environment. Change the usage environment.  
Connect via wired LAN.  
(' P139 [Connecting via Wired LAN] )  
ꢀ
GPS cannot be received.  
Signal reception from GPS satellites may be affected by buildings or  
trees.  
Perform positioning preferably at an unobstructed location with a clear  
view.  
ꢀ
The position is not accurate.  
The precision error may be up to hundreds of meters if the GPS signal  
is weak or reflected off surrounding buildings.  
162  
Lens Section  
Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Fujinon F1.6, 23x, f=4.1 mm to  
Lens  
General  
94.3 mm  
Item  
Power  
Description  
(35 mm conversion: 29 mm to  
667 mm)  
DC 12 V  
Filter diameter φ72 mm  
Power  
Approx. 13.0 W  
consumption  
(during recording with backlight  
set to [STANDARD] while the  
viewfinder is in use)  
Camera Section  
Item  
Description  
1/3-inch Progressive CMOS  
Mass  
Approx. 2.5 kg (with battery)  
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)  
Image pickup  
Allowable  
device  
operating  
Color separation F1.6, 3-color separation prism  
temperature  
prism  
Allowable  
operating  
humidity  
30 %RH to 80 %RH  
Sync system  
Optical filter  
Gain  
Internal sync (built-in SSG)  
OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64  
-6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB,  
9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, 21dB,  
24dB, Lolux (30dB, 36dB), ALC  
Allowable  
-20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F)  
storage  
temperature  
Electronic  
shutter  
1/6 to 1/10000, EEI  
Terminal Section  
Variable Frame 2/30-60/30fps, 2/25-50/25fps,  
Item  
Description  
Rate  
2/24-60/24fps  
3.5-inch LCD, 16:9 920K pixels  
[HD/SD SDI] output terminal (480i or 576i:  
Downconverted 720p/1080i: embedded audio),  
BNC (unbalanced)  
LCD monitor  
Viewfinder  
0.45-inch LCOS, 1.22M pixels  
(852 x 480 x 3)  
ꢀ
HD-SDI  
SD-SDI  
Compliant with SMPTE 292 M  
Compliant with SMPTE 259 M  
Storage Section  
[INPUT1/INPUT2] terminal  
Item  
Description  
SDHC/SDXC  
ꢀ
[MIC]  
-50 dBu, 3 k!, XLR (balanced),  
+48 V output (phantom power  
supply)  
Supported  
media  
Slots  
x 2  
[LINE]  
+4 dBu, 10 k!, XLR (balanced)  
[AUX] terminal -22dBu, 10 k!, 3.5 mm stereo  
mini jack (unbalanced)  
4-pin 3.5 mm mini jack  
[AV] terminal  
ꢀ
Video signal 1.0 V (p-p)  
Audio signal -8 dBu (during reference level  
input), 1 k! (unbalanced)  
[+] terminal  
[REMOTE]  
terminal  
3.5 mm mini jack (stereo)  
φ2.5 mm mini jack (stereo)  
[USB] terminal  
ꢀ
[DEVICE]  
Mini USB-B type, USB 2.0,  
miniB, slave function (mass  
storage class) only  
[HOST]  
USB-A type, USB2.0, network  
connection function only  
[TC] terminal  
ꢀ
[IN]  
1.0 V(p-p) to 4.0 V(p-p) high  
impedance  
[OUT]  
2.0 ± 1.0 V(p-p) low impedance  
163  
Item  
Description  
Video/Audio  
SD mode (MOV: H.264)  
ꢀ
Video  
QuickTime File Format  
Item  
Description  
recording file  
format  
Recording time Approx. 25 minutes (8 GB SD  
card, 35 Mbps, VBR mode)  
Video  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps  
720x480/59.94i (U model only),  
720x576/50i (E model only)  
HD mode (MOV/MP4/MXF: MPEG-2)  
ꢀ
Video  
QuickTime File Format (For  
recording file Final Cut Pro)/MP4 File Format/  
Audio  
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit  
format  
Video  
MXF File Format  
Web mode (MOV: H.264)  
ꢀ
Video  
QuickTime File Format  
ꢀ
HQ mode MPEG-2 Long GOP VBR, 35  
recording file  
format  
Mbps (Max) MP@HL,  
1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p,  
23.98p, 50i, 25p  
Video  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 1.2 Mbps  
480x270/29.97p, 23.98p, 25p  
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i  
1280x720/59.94p, 29.97p,  
23.98p, 50p, 25p  
Audio  
μ-law 2ch, 16 kHz  
Accessories  
SP mode MPEG-2 Long GOP CBR, 18.3  
Mbps MP@HL (720p)/25 Mbps  
MP@H14 (1080i)  
Accessories  
Warranty Card (U model only)  
Instructions  
CD-ROM  
AC Adapter  
Power Cord (U model: 1, E model: 2)  
Battery  
AV Cable  
Clamp Filter  
Wire Clamp  
Large Eyecup  
1
1
1
1
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i  
1280x720/59.94p, 50p  
Audio  
HD mode (AVCHD)  
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit  
ꢀ
Video  
AVCHD File Format  
recording file  
format  
1
1
1
1
1
Video  
ꢀ
HQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 24 Mbps  
(Max)  
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i  
SP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 17 Mbps  
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i  
Audio  
Dolby Digital 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit,  
256ꢀkbps  
HD mode (MOV: H.264)  
ꢀ
Video  
QuickTime File Format  
recording file  
format  
Video  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 35 Mbps  
(Max)  
1920x1080/59.94i, 23.98p, 50i  
Audio  
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit  
164  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)  
.
415.5  
57  
(HOOD)  
269.5  
345.5  
402.5  
* The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement without  
prior notice.  
165  
Index  
A
AC adapter .......................................... 29, 30  
Access point ............................................ 138  
Action ........................................................ 84  
Aspect ratio ................................................ 46  
Auto power off ........................................... 31  
Media mode ................................. 19, 34, 125  
Menu .............................................. 91, 92, 94  
Metadata .......................................... 140, 145  
N
ND filter ...................................................... 56  
Network ........................................... 123, 136  
Network operating environment ............... 137  
B
C
Backup rec ................................................ 74  
Battery ................................................. 15, 28  
Brightness adjustment ............................... 51  
O
P
OK mark .................................................... 88  
One push auto focus .................................. 49  
Camera mode .............................. 19, 34, 120  
Charging time ............................................ 29  
Clip continuous rec .................................... 77  
Clip cutter trig (splitting clips) ..................... 72  
Clip name ............................................. 43, 83  
Clip review ................................................. 71  
Color bar .................................................. 128  
Color matrix ............................................. 129  
Computer ................................................. 132  
Connection settings file ............................ 154  
Continuous operating time ......................... 29  
P2P .......................................................... 138  
Picture file ................................................ 130  
Picture quality setting ................................. 59  
Power .................................................. 30, 31  
Pre rec ....................................................... 76  
Preset zoom (browser) ............................ 149  
Preset zoom (camera) ............................... 48  
Push auto focus ......................................... 49  
R
S
Recordable time ........................................ 39  
Remote edit mode ............................... 19, 35  
Resolution .................................................. 45  
Restoring SD card ..................................... 42  
D
E
F
Deleting clips ............................................. 87  
Display screen ........................... 34, 120, 125  
Dual rec ..................................................... 73  
Safety zone display .................................. 128  
Scene file ................................................. 130  
SD/SDHC/SDXC card ......................... 15, 39  
Selecting multiple clips .............................. 89  
Setting the date/time .................................. 33  
Setup file .................................................. 130  
Shooting .................................................... 44  
Skin detail function ................................... 128  
Software keyboard ..................................... 93  
Spot meter ................................................. 68  
Status screen ..................................... 35, 127  
Switching shutter mode ............................. 54  
Switching shutter speed ............................ 54  
Error message ................................... 58, 157  
External monitor ....................................... 134  
Eyecup ...................................................... 27  
Face detection ........................................... 50  
Favorites menu ........................................ 117  
File Format ................................................. 45  
Focus ......................................................... 48  
Focus assist ............................................... 49  
Formatting (initializing) SD cards ............... 41  
Frame rec .................................................. 78  
FTP server ................................. 140, 85, 142  
G
T
Gain adjustment ........................................ 53  
GPS ............................................. 70, 17, 121  
Tally lamp .......................................... 38, 160  
Thumbnail (detailed screen) ...................... 84  
Thumbnail (standard screen) ..................... 82  
Thumbnail screen ...................................... 82  
Time code ...................................... 63, 64, 67  
Time code generator ................................. 64  
Time code playback ................................... 86  
H
I
Headphone ........................................ 62, 135  
Image stabilizer .......................................... 59  
Initial settings ............................................. 32  
Interval rec ................................................. 79  
Iris adjustment ........................................... 52  
U
V
USB mode ................................... 19, 35, 132  
User button ................................................ 38  
User’s bit .................................................... 63  
L
LCD monitor ............................. 17, 30, 34, 36  
Lens cover ................................................. 28  
M
Marker display ......................................... 128  
Variable frame rec ..................................... 81  
166  
Video format .............................................. 45  
View remote ............................................. 148  
Viewfinder ................................ 17, 30, 34, 37  
Wired remote control ............................... 136  
Wireless LAN ........................................... 138  
Z
Zebra pattern ............................................. 68  
Zoom ......................................................... 47  
W
Warning ............................................. 35, 160  
White balance adjustment ......................... 56  
White paint ................................................. 58  
Wired LAN ............................................... 139  
Symbol  
3G adapter ............................................... 140  
167  
.
LST1428-001A  
© 2012 JVC KENWOOD Corporation  

Adcom GFA 4702 User Manual
Briggs Stratton POWER BUILT 210000 User Manual
Canon PB E2 User Manual
Casio Cash Register QT 6000 User Manual
Genesis Advanced Technologies 2 2 User Manual
GPX PD7709B User Manual
Hyundai H LCDVD704 User Manual
JVC GET0199 001A User Manual
JVC GR AX475 User Manual
JVC GR AXM2 User Manual